online.cabrillo.edu · KA 1650 K:\2016\1650 - Cabrillo Greenhouse\Admin\SPECS\Project Manual\00 Stamp Page (2).doc CABRILLO COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT Cabrillo Community College,

$Page 1: online.cabrillo.edu · KA 1650 K:\2016\1650 - Cabrillo Greenhouse\Admin\SPECS\Project Manual\00 Stamp Page (2).doc CABRILLO COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT Cabrillo Community College,$
STEM 2 Greenhouse Project

Bid No. B17-14

***Specifications***

Bid RFI Questions Due:

Tuesday, July 11, 2017 2:00PM

Gale Stevens, Buyer

[email protected]

BID DOCUMENTS: GALE STEVENS, BUYER 831-477-5613 PROJECT MANAGER: JON SALISBURY, ICS, INNOVATIVE CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ARCHITECT: KASAVAN ARCHITECTS


CABRILLO COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT

Cabrillo Community College, Aptos Campus

STEM-2 Greenhouse

6500 Soquel Drive

Aptos, CA

PROJECT MANUAL Date: April 26, 2017 DSA File: #44-C1 DSA Application: #01-116674

Spec. No.

KA 1650

K:\2016\1650 - Cabrillo Greenhouse\Admin\SPECS\Project Manual\00 Stamp Page (2).doc

CABRILLO COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT Cabrillo Community College, Aptos Campus STEM-2 Greenhouse 6500 Soquel Drive Aptos, CA Peter J. Kasavan, Architect Kasavan Architects 60 W. Market Street, Suite 300 Salinas, CA 93901 Karen Wiinikka, Structural Engineer Donald C. Urfer & Associates, Inc. 2715 Porter Street Soquel, CA 95073 Metin Serttunc, Mechanical Engineer Axiom Engineers 2511 Garden Road, Suite 140 Monterey, CA 93940 Eldridge Bell, Electrical Engineer Aurum Consulting Engineering 60 Garden Road, Suite 210 Monterey, CA 93940

Jeffrey R. Naess, Civil Engineer Bowman and Williams 1011 Cedar Street Santa Cruz, CA 95060

KA 1650

T. of C.:1

CABRILLO COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT


STEM-2 Greenhouse

6500 Soquel Drive

Aptos, CA

PROJECT MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Special Conditions

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management And Coordination 013180 Request for Information (RFI) 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013233 Photographic Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014200 References 015000 Temporary Facilities And Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation And Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration And Training

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS – Not Used

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

033000 Concrete Site Work

033100 Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY – Not Used

DIVISION 05 – METALS – Not Used

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES – Not Used

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION – Not Used

KA 1650

T. of C.:2

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS – Not Used

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES – Not Used

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101423 Panel Signage

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT – Not Used

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – Not Used

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13123 Nexus Greenhouse Co. Specifications for Steel Structures and Acrylic Covering

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – Not Used

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

210000 Fire Protection General

210500 Overhead Fire Protection Systems

211000 Underground Fire Service

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220000 Utility Plumbing

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING – Not Used

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 General Electrical Conditions

260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable

260526 Grounding

260533 Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes

260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings

260543 Underground Ducts

260543 In-Grade Pull Boxes

262200 Transformers

262416 Panelboards and Distribution Panels

262726 Devices Wiring

262816 Circuit Breakers

265100 Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

283100 Fire Alarm System

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

310513 Earthwork

311000 Site Clearing

KA 1650

T. of C.:3

312317 Trenching

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321123 Aggregate Base Course

321216 Asphalt Paving

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

330516 Precast Utility Structures

334100 Utility Drainage Piping

Cabrillo College STEM 2 Greenhouse 1650

SPECIAL CONDITIONS C:1

SECTION C - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 STARTING AND COMPLETION DATES

A. Start Date: Specified in the Notice to Proceed.

B. Completion Date: Specified in the Notice to Proceed.

1.2 DOCUMENT DISCREPANCIES - PRIORITIES

A. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be

based on the following priorities.

1. The Agreement.

2. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date.

3. The Special Conditions.

4. The General Conditions.

5. Drawings and Specifications.

B. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document

not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided in

accordance with the Architect’s interpretation.

1.3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND PENALTIES

A. The Contractor shall forfeit and pay to the Owner the sum, per calendar day of ($ 2,500) for

each day that completion is delayed beyond the time of completion specified; or as extended in

accordance with the Specifications.

B. Additional penalties: Refer to the following sections for:

1. Frivolous RFI’s: See section 013180, Request for Information.

2. Non-responsive re-submittals: See section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENT

A. See General Conditions Section 1.18. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent

and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the

work. The Superintendent shall be satisfactory to both the Architect and the Owner’s

Representative and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Architect and the

Owner’s Representative. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all

communications given by or to the Superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor.

Important communications will be confirmed in writing. For the purposes of this section the

term Superintendent means the person at the site that is in charge of the construction project and

whose working title may be project manager, project engineer, superintendent or some other

such title.

1650


In order for the Architect to accept the Contractor’s superintendent, the candidate shall provide

sufficient documentation, to the Architect’s satisfaction, that they can manage this project. This

will include how they:

1. Have managed other projects of comparable size and complexity

2. Proactively manage all trades

3. Proactively maintain a time schedule

4. Determine the critical path of the schedule

5. Communicate and forward directives provided by the Architect to construction personnel

6. Determine what constitutes an RFI

If, in the Architect’s opinion, the superintendent fails to provide the specified level of

competency the Architect will inform the Contractor, in writing, that they must replace the

superintendent. The Architect’s decision in matters relating to this will be final if consistent

with the intent of the Contract Documents

B. The Contractor’s superintendent is required to be on site anytime work occurs, whether it is by

the Contractor’s own forces or those of their subcontractors. If Contractor fails to have such

superintendent on the site at any time during the progress of the work, a penalty of Six Hundred

Dollars ($600.00) per day shall be deducted from the compensation otherwise due to Contractor,

for each day on which such failure occurs. Such penalty shall not apply to temporary absences

approved in advance by the Architect or Owner’s Representative.

1.5 COMMUNICATIONS

A. See General Conditions Article 3 Architect, 3.11 Communications.

B. Communications on the site:

1. Between the Contractor and the Owner: Shall be through the Architect unless specifically

indicated otherwise.

2. Between General Contractors (on Multiple Prime Construction Projects): Shall be through

the Architect unless specifically indicated otherwise.

3. Between Subcontractors and Suppliers and all other parties: Shall be through the General

Contractor.

4. Between Consultants to the Architect and all other parties: Shall be through the Architect.

5. The Inspector of Record (IOR) may communicate directly with the Owner, Contractor

and/or Architect. All written communications from the IOR will be sent to all parties.

6. The Testing Lab of Record may communicate directly with the Owner, Contractor, IOR

and/or Architect. All written communications from the Testing Lab will be sent to all

parties.

1.6 ARTISTIC EFFECT

A. See General Conditions Article 3 Architect. The Architect’s decision in matters relating to

artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents

1.7 TIME EXTENSIONS

A. See General Conditions Section.

B. A request for a time extension will be considered only if it is occasioned by an event which can

be measured and demonstrated by the Critical Path network to have caused a delay in job

1650


completion; and only then, in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. See

Division 1 Section, Construction Progress Documentation, for additional information on the

Critical Path of the project.

C. Approved time extensions will include no associated costs unless the contractor is still

mobilized and working on the site during the approved extension and after the original contract

duration has expired.

D. Weather: No extension of time will be allowed for delays caused by Contractor’s failure or

neglect to construct and maintain all weather approaches or to provide specified pumping and

drainage. No extension of time will be allowed for “normal” weather conditions for the

particular time of year.

1.8 CHANGES IN WORK

A. Reasonable Allowance for Overhead and Profit:

See General Conditions Article 3. Overhead and Profit shall be computed as a percentage

addition of the cost to the contractor doing the work of the Labor and Materials necessary to

accomplish a change, exclusive of job overhead and profit.

1. For Work Done Directly by General Contractor: He shall be allowed 20% of the cost of

the work, if the total is less than or equal to $2,000.00 and 10% of the cost of the work if

the total exceeds $2,000.00.

2. For Work Done Directly by Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor:

a. That Subcontractor shall be allowed 20% of the cost of the work, if the total is less

than or equal to $2,000.00 and 10% of the cost of the work if the total exceeds

$2,000.00.

b. In addition, the General Contractor shall be allowed 05% of the cost of work, as a

handling charge, for work done directly by a Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor.

B. Time limits for submission of changes: See General Conditions. In addition:

1. For Work done on a “Time and Materials” basis: The Contractor shall submit all required

documents for a specific change within ten (10) days of completing the work.

2. Outstanding proposals at the end of the project: The Contractor shall submit all

outstanding proposals, in the specified format, within ten (10) days of the date established

as “Substantial Completion”. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to not process

any proposals received after that date unless specifically agreed in advance.

1.9 INSURANCE AND BONDS

A. See General Conditions, Article 6.

1.10 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. This project shall conform to applicable requirements prescribed by governmental bodies having

jurisdiction and is to be in accordance with:

1. 2013 California Administrative Code (CAC), Part 1, Title 24, CCR.

2. 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Volumes 1 & 2, Part 2, Title 24 CCR.

1650


3. 2013 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, Title 24 CCR

4. 2013 California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, Title 24 CCR

5. 2013 California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, Title 24 CCR

6. 2013 California Energy Code, Part 6, Title 24 CCR

7. 2013 California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24 CCR

8. 2013 California Referenced Standards Code, Part 12, Title 24, CCR.

9. Green Code

B. Should any part of the design fail to comply with such requirements, the discrepancy shall be

called to the attention of the Architect as quickly as possible.

C. Should there be any direct conflict between the Drawings and/or Specifications and the above

rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence. However, when the

indicated materials, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of a superior quality or

capacity to that required by above rules and regulations, the Drawings and/or Specifications

shall take precedence. Rulings and interpretations of enforcing agencies shall be considered as

part of the regulations.

D. Division of the State Architect (DSA)

1. The Contractor is hereby notified that this project is subject to observation and inspection

by the Division of State Architect, the Architect and his delegates, and the School Board

Inspector in accord with the provisions of Title 24, Sect. 4-333, 4-341 and 4-342. Tests

and testing lab are required and tests will be taken in accord with provisions of Title 24,

Sect. 4-335 and where elsewhere called out in the Specification. The Contractor shall

include among his duties the requirements of Title 24, Sect. 4-343, and submit verified

reports as required in, Section 4-336.

2. In submitting his proposal, the Contractor agrees that he is aware of and has included in

his bid, the appropriate cost of complying with all of the applicable provisions of Title 24,

Part 1, including those cited above.

E. Standards

1. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard

such as a Commercial Standard, American National Standard, a Federal Specification,

Industry or Government Code, a trade association code or standard, or other similar

standard, shall comply with the requirements in the latest revisions thereof and any

amendments or supplements thereto in effect on the date of these Specifications, except as

limited to type, class or grade, or modified in such reference.

The standard referred to, except as modified in the Specifications, shall have full force

and effect as though printed in these Specifications. These standards are not furnished to

Bidders since manufacturers and trades involved assumed to be familiar with their

requirements. The Architect shall furnish, upon request, information as to how copies of

the standards referred may be obtained.

1.11 DEFERRED APPROVAL BY DIVISION OF THE STATE ARCHITECT (DSA):

A. General: Any item listed as “deferred approval” must be approved by both the Architect /

Engineer and DSA before installation begins. Preparation of submittals to secure this approval

is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1650


1. Time frame for submittal: Allow sufficient time for review by the Architect and Engineer

as well as DSA. No time extension will be considered for failure to provide “deferred

approval” submittals in a timely manner even if it is the Critical Path task. Contact DSA

for time frame needed for their approval of deferred approval items.

2. Scope of submittal: Conform to requirements of Division 1 Section “Submittal

Procedures”. Provide all necessary documentation for DSA approval including:

a. All drawings needed to completely describe the work.

b. All product data needed to completely describe the work.

c. All product approval sheets from accepting agencies (fire alarm devices, etc) with

current dates.

d. All structural calculations needed to substantiate the design, stamped and signed

by a Structural Engineer, licensed in the State of California.

e. For equipment and systems: All diagrams and calculations (hydraulic, battery, etc)

needed to substantiate the design.

1.12 PERMITS AND FEES

A. See General Conditions: The Owner shall pay for all permits and fees of governing agencies

directly to these agencies.

PART II - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART III - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION C


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and

other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Phased construction.

4. Work by Owner.

5. Work under separate contracts.

6. Future work.

7. Purchase contracts.

8. Owner-furnished products.

9. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products.

10. Access to site.

11. Coordination with occupants.

12. Work restrictions.

13. Specification and drawing conventions.

14. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Cabrillo Community College, STEM-2 Greenhouse Project

1. Project Location: 6500 Soquel Drive, Aptos, CA

B. Owner: Cabrillo Community College District

1. Owner's Representative: Jon Salisbury, Project Manager

C. Architect: Kasavan Architects, 60 West Market Street, Ste. 300, Salinas, Ca 93901

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. New 2400 SF STEM-2 Greenhouse, associated site utilities and site paving.


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering

with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this

Contract with work performed by Owner.

1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out

smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during

construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform

work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear

and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not

use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial

Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work.

Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total

Work.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Unless approved in advance, confine construction and any noise producing

operations to the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday.

1. Night and Weekend Hours: Must be scheduled sufficiently in advance to suit the schedules

of the owner, inspector and testing lab.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

2. Full time supervision by an approved representative of the general contractor is required at

all times when work occurs. See Special Conditions.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

E. School District Calendar: Copies of the school calendar can be obtained from the District’s office

at 6500 Soquel Dr., Aptos, CA 95003. (831) 479-6100

F. Nonsmoking Buildings: Smoking is not permitted within any building or within 25 feet (8 m) of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

G. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on the Project site

is not permitted.

H. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project

site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

I. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of

Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These

conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of

all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the

individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products which are identified by abbreviations are scheduled

on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or

unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to

Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and

title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate

contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific



features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work

specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays

in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible

with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for

substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed

substitution within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of

additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved

substitutions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than fifteen (15) days prior to time required for preparation and review of

related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect

will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified

product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect’s standard form.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop

work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation

estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to

execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting

an extension of the Contract Time.



B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. Do

NOT proceed with work associated with this change until authorized in writing by the

Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to

substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the

Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed

change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for

preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of

allowances.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order

for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Architect’s standard form.

B. Changes may require the approval of the Division of the State Architect (DSA). Contractor

shall review with Architect and Inspector of Record to determine if changes will require

submittal to DSA.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

Architect’s standard form. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with

a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the

Contract Time.

2. For work done on a “time and material” (T&M) basis: T&M directives will presume that

labor will be billed at standard hourly rates and material delivery will use standard

shipping rates. If the Contractor anticipates the change will require additional cost for

overtime labor or additional cost for expedited delivery of materials they must secure the

approval of the Owner and Architect before proceeding.



B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

2. Submit the itemized cost and time proposal with fourteen (14) calendar days of

completing the work.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process

Applications for Payment.


1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and

processing of allowances.

2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

changes to the Contract.

3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to

various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for

Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and

schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven (7)

days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule

defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with

each element.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the

schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:



a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following

for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.

c. Name of subcontractor.

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

e. Name of supplier.

f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.

2) Materials.

3) Equipment.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of

Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of

contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five

percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and

stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include

evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show

line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured

quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase

contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if

any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include

total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-

place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed

as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications

for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the

Contract Sum.



1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with

previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and

final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the date established at

the pre-construction conference. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month,

ending on the last day of the month.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven (7) days prior to due date for review by

Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for


D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized

to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without

action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use

updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or

not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of

Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day

of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project

acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment

purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site

and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to

payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match

amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit

on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous


b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for

Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining

stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit six (6) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to

Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar

attachments if required.

1. Transmit each Application for Payment submittal with a transmittal form listing attachments

and recording appropriate information about application.



G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien

from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the

Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial unconditional waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application,

after deduction for retainage, on each item from every trade that received payment.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide

with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of values.

3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of

multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.

5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).

6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

7. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

8. Performance and payment bonds.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for

portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement

showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for

Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application

for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted,

including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that

taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

9. All outstanding Unconditional Waivers of Mechanic’s Liens.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Information (RFIs).

4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are

assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 013180 “Request for Information (RFI)

3. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-

engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

4. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of

the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion

of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.

Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within fifteen (15) days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.

Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,

including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names,

addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals

assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room & in temporary field office. Keep list current at all

times.



1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to

ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,

included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and

operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation

of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own

installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for

coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is

required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures

with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such

administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary

utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into,

the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's

property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings,

where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate

integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and

resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare

sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and

components.



b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by

multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information

and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural,

civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of

components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves,

and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.

g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to

be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide

alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor

dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the

Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible

ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with

section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and

electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to

accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between

light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and

elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor

closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation,

bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,

cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm

locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control

center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If

Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or



detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as

directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in

Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Site utility drawings: In addition to information listed above, show adequate information to assure

proper sequencing and coordination of utility installations including storm drain, water services

(domestic, fire and irrigation) electrical, gas, sanitary sewer, etc. showing at a minimum the following:

1. Sizes, locations, inverts, trench sizes and bottom of trench elevations for all underground utilities

and associated work.

2. Trench sections showing all elements to be installed including sizes, clearances and depths.

3. Dimensions locating this work including off-sets from buildings and clearances between and

among the various components of each system.

4. Dimensions from all foundations showing installation will clear foundation depth shown on

structural drawings OR, if required, locations where footings will be deepened if necessitated by

utility locations. If routing of utilities, whether inside or outside the building, requires deepening

of footings to accommodate specified burials, slopes, etc this will be provided by the contractor at

no additional cost.

5. Routing of all utilities through foundations to coordinate foundations, equipment and main utility

runs.

6. Routing of all utilities within buildings to coordinate walls and ceilings with duct runs, piping,

electrical, etc.

7. Routing of all new utilities through existing utility banks, where existing data is known, to

coordinate clearances to existing.

D. Submission requirements:

1. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

2. Number of Copies: Submit five (5) opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return two

(2) copies.

3. Timing: Submit coordination drawings at least two (2) weeks before work associated with the

tasks is scheduled. See Section C, Special Conditions, for Interim liquidated damages associated

with failure to meet this requirement.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with

no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or

work of subcontractors.

B. RFI Forms: See Specification Section 013180

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required,

of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and

times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.



3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner

and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after

execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and

its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the

conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to

conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFIs.

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

k. Submittal procedures.

l. Preparation of record documents.

m. Use of the premises.

n. Work restrictions.

o. Working hours.

p. Owner's occupancy requirements.

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

t. Construction waste management and recycling.

u. Parking availability.

v. Office, work, and storage areas.

w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

x. First aid.

y. Security.

z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected

by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that

have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting

dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular

activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.



c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility requirements.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written instructions.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required

corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring

information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate

whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and

reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient

to Owner and Architect, but no later than thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial

Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and

its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the

meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude

matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the

following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection

for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

f. Requirements for demonstration and training.

g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for

final payment.



i. Submittal procedures.

j. Coordination of separate contracts.

k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.

l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,

or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the

meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other

items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to

status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine

whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to

Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be

expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule

revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed

within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period. Each week, provide a “3 week look-ahead”

schedule that describes in detail the tasks scheduled for the next 3 weeks. Provide in

8 ½” x 11” format for inclusion with meeting minutes.

2) Each week the Contractor shall confirm the current critical path task as described in

the CPM schedule.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.

4) Status of submittals.

5) Deliveries.

6) Off-site fabrication.

7) Access.

8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Progress cleaning.

11) Quality and work standards.

12) Status of correction of deficient items.

13) Field observations.

14) Status of RFIs.

15) Status of proposal requests.

16) Pending changes.

17) Status of Change Orders.

18) Pending claims and disputes.

19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to

parties requiring information.



a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting

where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule

concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project

coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress

meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,

or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the

meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate

to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or

behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine

how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties

involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current

and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each

coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.

4) Status of submittals.

5) Deliveries.

6) Off-site fabrication.

7) Access.

8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Work hours.

11) Hazards and risks.

12) Progress cleaning.

13) Quality and work standards.

14) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others

affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.





REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 013180 - 1

SECTION 013180 – REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Description: Submit Request For Information (RFI), interpretation and/or clarification to the Architect

promptly upon identification of need, and in reasonable time so as not to affect the progress of the

Work. Refer to GENERAL CONDITIONS.

1.2 SUBMISSION PROCEDURES

A. General: Request for Information beyond that set forth in the Contract Documents will be considered

only when the request is in writing and fully documented.

B. Time: Identify and submit requests for information in a timely manner.

C. Pre-Submission Review: Before submitting an RFI to the Architect, no matter what the source, the

Contractor shall conduct a comprehensive good-faith effort to research the record and locate the

information in the Contract Documents including addenda modifications drawings, change orders, prior

RFI’s, and meeting minutes. The Contractor shall be prepared to demonstrate or document this research

upon request. RFI’s may be returned without actions if this effort has not been demonstrated.

D. Category of Request:

1. General: Submit requests for information when one or more of the following conditions occur:

2. Need for Clarification: When information shown or indicated in the Contract Documents is

unclear in its intent.

3. Unforeseen Condition: Discovery of unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not shown or

indicated in the Contract Documents.

4. Conflict Within Documents: Discovery of an apparent inconsistency, conflict or discrepancy

between different portions of the Contract Documents, where the intent cannot be reasonably

inferred from information shown or indicated.

5. Omission: Discovery of what appears to be an omission in the Contract Documents, where the

intent cannot be reasonably inferred from information shown or indicated.

6. Sequencing Problem: Discovery of unforeseen condition in sequencing placement of work

that is specifically related to the Contract Documents.

E. Unacceptable Requests:

1. General: Do not submit requests for information for confirmation of any action already taken by

the Contractor. Requests will not be accepted that imply confirmation of any unauthorized

change to the Work.

2. Untimely Submission: A request for information that is submitted in a belated manner without

proper coordination and scheduling of the Work of related subcontractors will not be reviewed

and will be returned to the Contractor.

3. Frivolous RFI: Contractor shall be charged all reasonable costs including fees for professional

services of Architect, but not less than one hundred dollars ($100.00) for costs associated with

submittal of each RFI determined to be frivolous. Among other remedies, the District can

deduct this amount from progress payments. Basis for determining a frivolous RFI includes but

is not limited to one of the following factors: Lack of the Contractor exercising due diligence to



locate required information in the Contract Documents; request for information that is apparent

from field observations, or is contained in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable

from them; request for information that is repetitive or is substantially incomplete. The

Architect shall be solely responsible for determining whether a RFI is frivolous.

4. Submittal: A request for information that is included as part of a submittal will not be

processed; see Section 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE.

5. Substitution: A request for information that is a request for substitution will not be processed;

see Section 012500 – SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS.

6. Exclusionary Submission: A request that implies that specific portions of the work are assumed

to be excluded or considering a separate portion of the Contract Documents in part rather than as

a whole will not be processed.

F. Log: Contractor shall prepare and maintain the official log of requests for information. Review status

of log at each job progress meeting.

1.3 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Request For Information (RFI) Form:

1. General: Provide a completed and legible copy of the RFI Form included at the end of this

Section with each submittal.

2. RFI Number: Identify RFIs sequentially starting from number one (1); number re-submissions

with same number as original and add letter designation A., B., C., etc., in order submitted, until

resolution is achieved.

3. Contractor: Provide company name and mailing address with Certification signature by person

responsible for work on this Project.

4. Subcontractor and/or Supplier: Provide company name, mailing address, telephone number and

name of contact person responsible for work on this Project.

5. RFI Description:

a. General: Describe subject of RFI completely.

b. Specifications References: Identify specification section number and paragraph number

under consideration.

c. Drawing References: Identify specific drawing number and/or detail number under

consideration.

d. Attachments: Identify as required, to support description.

6. Contractor's Proposed Resolution:

a. General: Describe suggested resolution; support with attachments as required.

b. Cost Impact: Indicate impact on costs if additional compensation requested; explain

Contractor's original basis for bid and, based on the current request, reason that

additional costs should be considered.

c. Time Impact: Indicate effect on schedule if additional time requested; explain

Contractor's original basis for bid and, based on the current request, why a time

extension should be considered.

1.4 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSE

A. General: Architect will respond on the RFI Form and include attachments, as referenced. Verbal and

FAX responses to such requests are to be considered informational; official written response will only

be given on original RFI Form.



B. Architect's Review:

1. General: Allow fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt. If more than ten (10) requests are

received within one (1) calendar week, the Architect will specifically schedule and extend

response time as required to accomplish the reviews.

2. Prioritization: If more than five (5) requests have been received by the Architect, the Contractor

shall identify the order of requests most critical to the schedule of the Project.

1.5 DISTRIBUTION

A. General: Submit two (2) original, signed copies. One (1) will be retained by Architect, the other will be

returned with the official response, to the Contractor. Only the original copy with wet signatures and

identified attachments will be considered official. Coordinate or modify distribution with Architect – to

expedite response.

B. Consultants: The Architect will distribute copies of requests for information to project consultants, as

required for their participation. Direct communication and response from project consultants will be

considered informational only.

C. Response: The Contractor will make and distribute copies of the official response to subcontractors and

suppliers, as required.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END SECTION 013180

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

PROJECT NAME: Frank Paul School 2-Story Classroom Bldg & Site

Improvements

Alisal Union School District

1300 Rider Avenue, Salinas, Ca 93905

KA JOB NO. 1512

RFI NO.

TO: KASAVAN ARCHITECTS

60 W. MARKET STREET, SUITE 300

SALINAS, CA 93901

FROM: Contractor’s Name & address info here

SUBJECT:

CATEGORY: NEED FOR CLARIFICATION OMISSION UNFORESEEN CONDITION SEQUENCING PROBLEM CONFLICT WITHIN DOCUMENTS

SPEC. SECTION

PARAGRAPH NO.

DRAWING NO.

DETAIL NO.

DESCRIPTION: CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSED RESOLUTION: ATTACHMENTS:

COST IMPACT: $ EST. TIME IMPACT: EST. CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION: I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE REVIEWED THIS RFI AND HAVE CONDUCTED THE COMPREHENSIVE RESEARCH NOTED IN 013180 – 1.2.C AND THE INFORMATION REQUESTED IS IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE DEFINITION OF THE CATEGORY INDICATED. SIGNATURE: ___________________________ DATE: _______________

ARCHITECT RESPONSE: ATTACHMENTS: ARCHITECT SIGNATURE:

DATE:

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

PROJECT NAME: STEM-2 Greenhouse


6500 Soquel Drive, Aptos, CA

KA JOB NO. 1650

RFI NO.

TO: KASAVAN ARCHITECTS

60 W. MARKET STREET, SUITE 300

SALINAS, CA 93901

FROM: Contractor’s Name & address info here

SUBJECT:

CATEGORY: NEED FOR CLARIFICATION OMISSION UNFORESEEN CONDITION SEQUENCING PROBLEM CONFLICT WITHIN DOCUMENTS

SPEC. SECTION

PARAGRAPH NO.

DRAWING NO.

DETAIL NO.

DESCRIPTION: CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSED RESOLUTION: ATTACHMENTS:

COST IMPACT: $ EST. TIME IMPACT: EST. CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION: I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE REVIEWED THIS RFI AND HAVE CONDUCTED THE COMPREHENSIVE RESEARCH NOTED IN 013180 – 1.2.C AND THE INFORMATION REQUESTED IS IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE DEFINITION OF THE CATEGORY INDICATED. SIGNATURE: ___________________________ DATE: _______________

ARCHITECT RESPONSE: ATTACHMENTS: ARCHITECT SIGNATURE:

DATE:


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Construction schedule updating reports.

4. Daily construction reports.

5. Material location reports.

6. Site condition reports.

7. Special reports.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and

controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and

resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early

start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by

Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where

activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities

can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule

that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.



F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly

owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones

and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early

start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely

affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an

activity as scheduled.


A. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for

entire construction period.

B. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each

activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original

duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total

float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual

start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending

order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

E. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

F. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

G. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

H. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting,

with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the

preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to,

the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.



2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.

3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy.

4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.

5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.

11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in

proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final

completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early

completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of

the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items

and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.

Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,

fabrication, and delivery.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's

construction schedule with submittal schedule.

3. Startup and Testing Time: Include sufficient time for startup and testing so all will be complete

prior to substantial completion.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification

of Substantial Completion.

5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than thirty (30) days for completion of punch

list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as

follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.



2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.

3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date

indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible

delivery date.

5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date

indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible

delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.

c. Uninterruptible services.

d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.

e. Use of premises restrictions.

f. Provisions for future construction.

g. Seasonal variations.

1) Include a factor for normal rain days for the time of year and the project’s location.

See Special Conditions, Section C, for additional requirements.

h. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,


a. Subcontract awards.

b. Submittals.

c. Purchases.

d. Mockups.

e. Fabrication.

f. Sample testing.

g. Deliveries.

h. Installation.

i. Tests and inspections.

j. Adjusting.

k. Curing.

l. Building flush-out.

m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work.

Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated

with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion.

b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.

c. Permanent space enclosure.

d. Completion of mechanical installation.

e. Completion of electrical installation.

f. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not

limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:



1. Unresolved issues.

2. Unanswered Requests for Information.

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.

4. Notations on returned submittals.

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is fourteen (14) or more calendar days

behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which

Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working

days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be

accomplished.

G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been

developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven (7)

days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each

week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first sixty (60) days

of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement

prediction based on indicated activities.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within twenty (20) days of date established for

commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first sixty (60) days of

construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction

based on indicated activities.

1. See Section C, Special Conditions, for Interim Liquidated Damages associated with failure to

deliver this schedule within the specified time.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM

network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use

no later than sixty 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse

Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of

Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including

subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule

information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress.

Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.



4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and

holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the

startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each

activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.

c. Purchase of materials.

d. Delivery.

e. Fabrication.

f. Utility interruptions.

g. Installation.

h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.

i. Testing.

j. Punch list and final completion.

k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion

dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network.

Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the

CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with

most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,

prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed

change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight

"early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

2. Description of activity.

3. Main events of activity.

4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.

5. Early and late start dates.

6. Early and late finish dates.

7. Activity duration in workdays.

8. Total float or slack time.

9. Average size of workforce.

10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing

the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed.

2. Changes in early and late start dates.

3. Changes in early and late finish dates.

4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.



5. Changes in the critical path.

6. Changes in total float or slack time.

7. Changes in the Contract Time.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information

concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Unusual events (see special reports).

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.

16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials

delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported

plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for

materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following

categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the

Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information.

Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing


2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one (1) day of an occurrence. Distribute

copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,

whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,



persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar

pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM

scheduling.

1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs

skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit

qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged

delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual

construction progress and activities. Issue schedule three (3) days before each regularly scheduled

progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been

recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,

changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing

and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule

responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of

the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.

2. Periodic construction photographs.

3. Final completion construction photographs.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as project

record documents at Project closeout.

3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration

of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.


A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for

location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same

information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three (3) days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.

2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the

sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied

by key plan file.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata

tag:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and contact information for photographer.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Date photograph was taken.

f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.


A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional

photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.



1.5 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of

photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size

of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly

show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic

location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without

alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,

available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to

Architect.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take twenty (20) photographs of Project site

and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different

vantage points, as directed by Architect.

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.

2. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.

3. Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record

physical conditions at start of construction.

4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures,

pavements, and improvements.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take twenty (20) photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff

date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction

and progress since last photographs were taken.

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take twenty (20) color photographs after date of

Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform

photographer of desired vantage points.

1. Do not include date stamp.

G. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs

specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the

Contract Sum.



1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.

3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Special events planned at Project site.

b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.

c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.

d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.

e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.

f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Purpose of Submittals

1. Shop drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals (collectively “Submittals”) are not

contract documents.

2. The purpose for submittals is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to provide or

incorporate such item of the work in conformity with the contract documents and in a manner that

is coordinated with the other work in the contract.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule

of values.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports,

including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance

manuals.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration

of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

6. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for submitting comparable product substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's

responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections

as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require

Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as

"informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from

another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP

site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external

users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for

representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout

document format.




A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required

by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and

delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions

to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by

those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's


2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals

required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain

orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture

or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's


a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for

submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

i. Scheduled dates for installation.

j. Activity or event number.

B. Deadline for Submittals: All submittals must be received by the Architect no later than sixty (60)

calendar days after the date established for commencement of work. See Section C, Special Conditions,

for Interim Liquidated Damages associated with failure to meet this requirement.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of select CAD Drawings of the Contract

Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals under the following

conditions:

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one CD of digital data drawing files of select Contract Drawings

for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data

drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings will only be made available in

AutoCad 2016 format.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form

acceptable to Owner and Architect.

d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

1) Site Plan.

2. The contractor shall be required to pay a fee of $xx.xx for each drawing requested. Each CAD

file may contain multiple drawings.



B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction

activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and

related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial

submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section

as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing

will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with

other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time

for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will

be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit

processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional

time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial

submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow fifteen 15 days for review of each re-submittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or

other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to

record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.


d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of subcontractor.

g. Name of supplier.

h. Name of manufacturer.

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal

point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an

alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Other necessary identification.



4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless

Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal

may serve as final submittal.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for

transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return,

without review, submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use form acceptable to Owner and Architect.

Provide locations on form for the following information:

1) Project name.

2) Date.

3) Destination (To:).

4) Source (From:).

5) Name and address of Architect.

6) Name of Construction Manager.

7) Name of Contractor.

8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

10) Category and type of submittal.

11) Submittal purpose and description.

12) Specification Section number and title.

13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

15) Indication of full or partial submittal.

16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

18) Remarks.

19) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation

to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall

include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings

and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing

the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.


f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.



i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by

Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,

including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Provide a response to all submittal comments from the previous submittal. Failure to do so will

cause rejection of the resubmittal and a back charge to the contractor for additional resubmittals

of this scope of work. The back charge amount will be as follows:

a. Minimum charge: $400 per resubmittal

b. Larger resubmittals: Additional review time will be done on an hourly basis and will be

billed at the Architect’s standard hourly rates. A specific cost will be provided if

requested.

4. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,

installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction

activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual

Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically

established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic

Project record document file.

2. Action Submittals: Submit five (5) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two (2) copies.

3. Informational Submittals: Submit two (2) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will not return copies.



4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity

responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer

or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates

and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where

indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of

product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not

suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts unless custom colors are specified.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Five (5) paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two

copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop

Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based

on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following

information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

1) Include all related blocking, anchoring, waterproofing. lapping, sequencing, etc

requirements.

2) Clearly indicate which components are not a part of your scope. Clearly mark these

as “By others”.



g. Seal and signature of professional California licensed engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings

on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750

by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Five (5) opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return two (2) copies.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and

actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one

submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal

of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification

information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to

determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification

Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are

the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections

of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full sets of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product

line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from

same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically

identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture

variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of

manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of

repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and

components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;

remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be

demonstrated.



2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or

product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show

approximate limits of variations.

7. Color Selection: Will be made by Architect once preliminary submittals for all items requiring

color selection have been reviewed and accepted by the Architect.

a. The Architect will present color selections to the owner for approval before releasing to the

contractor.

b. Field Samples:

1) See individual sections for items requiring field samples.

2) Use approved color selections to prepare actual on-site materials, textures and colors

in trial areas selected by the Architect. Exterior color samples will include one

building corner from grade to roof; interior field samples will include at least one

wall corner as well as floor and ceiling where required.

3) The Architect reserves the right to make minor changes to texture, color value and

hue at no change to contract price.

4) Do not commence finish work until Architect has approved field samples in writing.

E. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project

Management and Coordination."

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or

person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of

architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with

requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and

Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by

manufacturer for this specific Project.

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.



Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in


R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed

by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following

information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for

compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of

product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed

either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list

of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load

diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include

page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other

Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field

dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout

Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and

location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of

Contractor's approval, and the following statement.

“I certify that the submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the

Contract Documents and suitability for the intended installation including:



a. Whether submittal is a substitution and is in alignment with requirements for a substitution

(See Division 1 Section “Product Requirements” for Substitution requirements).

b. That the submittal is complete

c. That all components in the submittal are clearly called out.

d. That the submittal has been coordinated with other submittals for a complete project.”

D. Attach the Approval Stamp to the cover of each copy of every submittal.

1. Affix signature to each Approval Stamp.

E. Contractor shall not forward any submittal that is not in full compliance with these requirements and the

contract documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will

mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if

it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has

received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for

resubmittal without review.

E. Resubmittals that do not respond to all comments and/or markings from the previous submittal will be

considered non-responsive. They will be returned without further review and the contractor will be

charged for each additional resubmittal as described above.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract

Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are

specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also

cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance

and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by

Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution

of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will

comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution

of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction

comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by

Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify

selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated,

qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface

between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances.

Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by

which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and

materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency

qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish

product performance and compliance with specified requirements.



F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill,

factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the

Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory

shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including

installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain

construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements

specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being

familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. 2013 California Building Code and all other codes listed in “Codes & Standards” Section C. A copy

shall be retained on site for reference by all parties having a reasonable need.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the

most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to

Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the

minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum

quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with

these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context

of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating

materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.



B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within ten (10) days of Notice of Award,

and not less than five (5) days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to

Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to

carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with

Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced

in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent

to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review

and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal

review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring

testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of

Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection

specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with

standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and

rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate

corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.

Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the

following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,

if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements.

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,

judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards

and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.




A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;

individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this

Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity

to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in

construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the

kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,

assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience

and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329,

and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities

having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer

who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's

products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's

products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for

compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results

to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to

adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.



d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same

tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of

construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse

products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and

similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and

inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates

from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of

construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated

for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will

be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the

completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner

will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies

engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Inspection: The owner will employ and pay for the services of a project inspector to perform

services which are the owner’s responsibility in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-333

and 4-342, title 24, Part 1, CCR.

3. Testing: The owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing

laboratory or other qualified firm to perform services which are the owner’s responsibility in

accordance with the provisions of Section 4-335, title 24, Part 1, CCR.

4. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that

failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract

Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's

responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies

with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by

authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by

authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to

perform these quality-control services.



a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by

Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or

inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified

written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are

Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when

they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report

results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative

to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include

participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of

materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and

submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction

that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties.

Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work

during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are

conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or

accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar

quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency

sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.

Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.



H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -

control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction

to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control

services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan.

Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work

progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect testing agencies, and each party involved

in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged

construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification

Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend

restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with

the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for

quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control

performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to

dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on

which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's

"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'

"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the

Contract Documents.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.

2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.

3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.

4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org.

5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.

6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.

7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.

8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.

9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.

10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.

11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.

12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.

13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.

14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.

15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.

16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.

17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.

18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.

19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.

20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.

21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.

22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.

23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.

24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.

25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).

26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).

27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.



28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.

29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See

ASCE).

30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.

31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org.

32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.

33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.

34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials

International); www.astm.org.

35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.

36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.

37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.

38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com.

39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-

Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com.

40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.

41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.

42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.

43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.

44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.

45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association); www.bifma.com.

46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.

47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See

ICC).

48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bwfbadminton.org.

49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.

50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.

51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.

52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.

53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.

54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.

55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.

56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.

57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.

58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.

59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.

60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.

61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.

62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.

63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.

64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-

international.org.

65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.

66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.

67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.

68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).



69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.

70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.

71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org.

72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA).

73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.

75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.

76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.

77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).

78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.

79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball

Federation); www.fiba.com.

80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball

Federation); www.fivb.org.

81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.

82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.

83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com.

84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.

85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.

86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.

87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.

88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.

89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.

90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).

91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).

92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.

93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.

94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.

95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).

96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).

97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.

99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.

100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.

101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.

102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.

103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of

North America); www.ies.org.

104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).

105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.

106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.

107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;

www.igshpa.okstate.edu.

108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.

109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com.

110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems,

and Automation Society); www.isa.org.

111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).



112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid

Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.

113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.

114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).

115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.

116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.

117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).

118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.

119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.

120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.

121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.

122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.

123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.

124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.

125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding &

Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.

126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.

127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;

www.mss-hq.org.

128. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;

www.naamm.org.

129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers

International); www.nace.org.

130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.

131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.

132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.

133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.

134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.

135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.

136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.

137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.

138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.

139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.

140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.

141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.

142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).

143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.

144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.

145. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.

146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).

147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.

148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.

149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.

150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.

151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.

152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.

153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.

154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.

155. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.

156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.



157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology

Association); www.plasa.org.

158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.

159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.

160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.

161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.

162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.

163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.

164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.

165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.

166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See

ASCE).

167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.

168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.

169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.

170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org.

171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.

172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.

173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.

174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.

175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.

176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.

177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.

178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.

179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.

180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.

181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.

182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);

www.tileusa.com.

183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.

184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA -

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);

www.tiaonline.org.

185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See

TIA).

186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.

187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.

188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.

189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.

190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).

191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.

192. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.

193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.

194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.

195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.

196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.

197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.

198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.

199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.



200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California);

www.wicnet.org.

201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).

202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.

203. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This

information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.

2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;

www.iapmo.org.

3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.

2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.

3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.

4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.

6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.

7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.

8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.

9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.

11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.

12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.

13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.

14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research

Program; www.trb.org.

15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity

Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.

16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.

17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov.

18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.

19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and

regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be

accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.



1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from

Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).

4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).

5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.

b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).

7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.

8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the

Contract Documents.

1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic

Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24

Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).

4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-

iaq.org.

5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.

6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.

7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry;

http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection

facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

2. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt pavement for

temporary roads and paved areas.

3. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete

pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the

Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities

without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available

for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available

for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction

personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction

General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having

jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction

from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or

water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water

intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.



3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,

plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations.

Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of

finish materials.

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and

HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their

operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include

the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.

4. Waste handling procedures.

5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric

service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary

utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a

construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-

link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-

(60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-

steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum

2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-

inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting

posts.

C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, [6 feet (1.8 m)] [8 feet (2.4 m)] high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch

(50-by-100-mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart.

D. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-

spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

E. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624

mm).

F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.



2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls,

and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and

construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other

Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and

bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide

electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on

each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and

marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.

4. Coffee machine and supplies.

5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72

deg F (20 to 22 deg C).

6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height.

C. Office for Inspector: Provide a separate room or building of not less than 80 sq. ft. with a separate

lockable door for Project Inspector. Furnish and equip as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinet, plan table, plan rack, and

bookcase.

2. Drinking water or direct access to contractor’s supply.

3. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72

deg F (20 to 22 deg C).

D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials

and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and

classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-

contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is

prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary

use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and

remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout

Procedures".

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage

filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with

performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no

longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide and install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service

facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to

condition existing before initial use.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction

personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for

curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects

of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied

areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed

according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing

occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units,

starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until

removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing

equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped

vacuum equipment.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for

curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects

of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or

elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required

and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level

required to allow installation or application of finishes.



G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a

condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,

capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without

operating entire system.

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.

c. Contractor's home office.

d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.

e. Architect's office.

f. Engineers' offices.

g. Owner's office.

h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away

from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or

within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply

with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove

before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be

permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate

for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits

indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as

required to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same

location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction

limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.



2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to

Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading,

proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately

before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation

of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining

properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated on the Drawings. Unauthorized signs are not

permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.

2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and

equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other

improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered.

Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as

required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and

subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Section 311000

"Site Clearing."

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in

and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from

heavy rains.



E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees

to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from

damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring

of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular

intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control

operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a

manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to

accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.

Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of

construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar

violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for

erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as

required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and

completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide

temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary

enclosures.

L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and

to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each

side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18

inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-

retardant-treated plywood.

2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities

having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.

4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks

where openings are required.

5. Protect air-handling equipment.

6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to

protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage

fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of

fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project

site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct

personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.



4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign

stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose

size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs

of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to

wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

4. Remove standing water from decks.

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure

and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and

ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high

organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.

5. Do not install material that is wet.

6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing

the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure

but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.

3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure

to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based

products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for forty-eight

(48) hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during

construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of

exposure and continuing daily for forty-eight (48) hours. Identify materials containing

moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level

within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit

availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.



1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and

similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid

possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection

facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when

it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.

Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of

interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace

construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner

reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into

permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and

aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials

contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances

that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and

sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700

"Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project;

product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special

warranties; and comparable product substitutions.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from

previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"

and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model

number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is

current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility.

Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have

the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical

properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is

named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or

other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating

comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and

title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products"

Article.

2. Architect's Action:

a. Substitutions or Comparable Products: If necessary, Architect will request additional

information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable

product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed

comparable product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days

of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.



1) Form of Approval: Architect’s written directive.

2) Only one request for substitution or comparable product will be considered for each

product. If the proposed substitution or comparable product is not accepted the

Contractor will provide the specified product.

3) With respect to finishes, visual or aesthetic effect is a significant basis for determining

equivalency and may be the single cause for rejection based solely on the Architect’s

determination.

4) The burden of proof for equivalency rests entirely with the Contractor. The opinion of

the Architect, as the original specifier, shall be the final determination.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product

request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use

on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected

products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with

products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,

Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and

loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of

construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are

flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,

unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to

determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure

above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation

and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,

and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.



7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by

Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties

required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties

do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular

product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights

for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready

for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly

executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written

document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting

special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a

complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,

provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar

situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or

approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to

obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named

product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's

convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a

product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable

products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products & Manufacturers:



a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and

products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable

products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that

complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article

for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on

Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a

comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications

indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.

Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed

product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a

product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be

final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified

requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal

of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect

will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both

standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when

the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return

requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is

consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is

compatible with other portions of the Work.

a. Provide a detailed side-by-side comparison of the proposed product with the specified

product. Include:

1) Comparative specifications

2) Comparative layouts., installation requirements and details

3) Comparative conformance to all referenced standards.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and

addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work


1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. Installation of the Work.

4. Cutting and patching.

5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

6. Progress cleaning.

7. Starting and adjusting.

8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record

Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final

cleaning.

4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the

building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other

work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation

of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of

improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least ten (10) days prior to the time

cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural

elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other

significant visual elements.



3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching

work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and

those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and

systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of

permanent services and systems.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous

materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the

kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of

construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations

and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and

support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements

in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased

maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.

c. Air or smoke barriers.

d. Fire-suppression systems.

e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

f. Control systems.

g. Communication systems.

h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.

i. Conveying systems.

j. Electrical wiring systems.

k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in

a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to

perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or

safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.

c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.

e. Equipment supports.

f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.



4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of

cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in

Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction

that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in

cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference

and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will

provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place

materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction

indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence

and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction

affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary

sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving

Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,

examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be

installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing

finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is

required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.



4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the

Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in

or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other

construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on

Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of

Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100

"Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in

relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify

Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and

elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site.

3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions.

4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and

topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.

Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and

piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.

Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each

survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by

Architect.



3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points

before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during

construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of

Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report

the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base

replacements on the original survey control points.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation,

as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease

of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90

inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain

conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading

in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on

site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory

prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions

are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and

number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions

of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for

load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights

directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral

anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in

time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange

joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.



J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with

cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other

construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during

installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing

warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting

and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free

passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in

Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are

required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to

minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining

construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original

Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and

chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance

of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core

drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by

cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.

Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture

or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable.

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where

applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate

physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into

retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and

refinishing.



a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into

another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of

uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and

replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat

over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch

blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface

of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar,

oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's

construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable

timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual

construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend

preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work

depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements

strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are

working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper

execution of the Work.



1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of

manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.

If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to

health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down

sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction

Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials

already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or

deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the

remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability

without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure

during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in

Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,

replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without

binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace

damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not

limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction

photographic documentation.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other

Sections.



1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and

corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the

Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10) days prior

to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are

incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction

permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include

occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record

documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic

documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record

information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar

documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare

parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label

with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance

material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number

of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10) days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that

are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment,

and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900

"Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum

of ten (10) days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On

receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled

requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will



notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that

must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final

completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion

inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by

Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise

resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying

with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10

days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of

request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.

Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of

construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction

operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed

by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from

lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.



e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. OR

b. Five (5) paper copies. Architect will return two (2) copies.



1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the

Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or

when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated

portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by

separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project

Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-

280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to

identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,

including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"

Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and

bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation

to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of

the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or

property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use

products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with

local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance

program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:



a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign

deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of

exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,

shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove

glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and

glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar

equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting

from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of

diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction

or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide

written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and

Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of

Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,

refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating

equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.

Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.



1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other

damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace

finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical

and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or

reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy

starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance

manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and

maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification

Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted

and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and

field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item

name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three (3) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title

pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return one copy.



C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual

are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least fifteen (15) days before commencing demonstration and training.

Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each

corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing

demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data

and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include

a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and

maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of

equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify

each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract

Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4,

"Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each

manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.



6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.

7. Name and contact information for Architect.

8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.

9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals.

10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the

content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate

data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,

subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and

components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF

file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used

in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem

into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting

bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree.

Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear

plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold

folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in

each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other

binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance

of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.

Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark

each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section

number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software

storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as

foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,



insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing

locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and

similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of

Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment

indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.



2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and

warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to

match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of

Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number

and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related

services.



F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source

information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and

service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty

and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list

name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and

cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule

designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including

the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required

lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service

with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly,

semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of

maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone

number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an

organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use

by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data

indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a

system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for

each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable

to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where

the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of

component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.

Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct

illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project

Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including

the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set of file prints.

2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information

recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set of prints.

2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping

requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities.

C. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents

concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes,

product selections, and other notations incorporated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop

Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from

that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether

individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for

preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to

identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

f. All record data shall be drawn with drafting tools in a professional manner, using heavy

line weights and 1/8” minimum lettering. Graphic techniques shall match drawings with

respect to dimension lines, leader arrows, text symbols, abbreviations, etc. If Contractor

does not have a qualified in-house drafter, Contractor shall retain or contract with a

professional able to meet quality standards.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below first floor.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel

proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between

changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from

original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and

similar identification, where applicable.

7. Site Utilities: Locate all new underground work, and all existing underground work

encountered, by:

a. Horizontal dimensions to permanent walls or columns.

b. Vertical dimensions below finished grade or by invert elevation.

c. For existing utilities include utility type, size and approximate direction it is running.



d. Cross out routing or location shown on drawings if not in the correct location. Redraw in

the actual location.

e. For work concealed in a building provide sufficient information so it can be located with

reasonable accuracy and ease.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings

where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are

suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an

alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the

actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared

record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing,

copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable

sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Architect.


2.2 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record

keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous

records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number

and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record

document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not

wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field

office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents

for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible

condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for

Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,

including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,

including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time,

and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each

training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training

video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live

instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For videographer.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction

time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of

performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven (7) days of end of

each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and address of videographer.



e. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark

appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same

label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of

video recording on each page.



3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and

bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance

personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and

whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and

training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing

demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to

demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and

procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize

disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and

course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has

been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each

system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a

description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module,

include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.



e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project record documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.



f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with

requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to

coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants,

instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,

subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements,

criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.

3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal

operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and

maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of

module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional

equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video

recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and

demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.



1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and

lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to

Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade

graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of

contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video

segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on

the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each

Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer.

b. Business address.

c. Business phone number.

d. Point of contact.

e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to

adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.

b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual

table of contents.

c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop

filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of

new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment

markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video

recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from

videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in

same format as recordings of live training.



Bowman & Williams No. 26759

CONCRETE SITE WORK 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CONCRETE SITE WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Provisions for Constructing:

a. Miscellaneous concrete for use in site work, concrete curbs, and equipment pads.

B. Related Sections

1. SECTION 31 05 13 – EARTHWORK

2. SECTION 31 23 17 – TRENCHING

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Standards listed below, after their abbreviated designation, apply where the designation is cited in

this Section. Refer to the latest edition unless otherwise noted.

B. Local Agency Specifications

1. When applying the cited standards, the following shall be understood.

a. Terms such as Commission, Department or Agency shall mean the College. b. Terms such as Director, Executive Officer, or Engineer shall mean the College's

Representative. c. In case of discrepancies between the cited standards and this Section, this Section

governs. d. All references to statistical testing are deleted. e. All references to measurement and payment are deleted.

2. Standards cited:

a. State of California, Department of Transportation's (Caltrans) "Standard Specifications", (CSS).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog cuts for each specified or indicated manufactured product.

B. Quality Control Submittals




1. Certificate of compliance with specified industry standards.

C. Samples: 3’x 3’x 4” concrete samples of color and texture for approval.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit, or

surface is frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE BASE AND SUBBASE

A. See SECTION 31 05 13 – EARTHWORK and SECTION 32 11 23 – AGGREGATE BASE

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Concrete mixes by minimum 28-day strength unconfined compressive strength for concrete of at

least 2500 psi to be used for walkways, stairways, ramps, utility pads, and utility work such as manholes

and thrust blocks.

28 - day Max. size of Max.

Strength Aggregate Slump

2500 psi 1" 4"

B. Use only one brand type of cement for each type of concrete finish

2.4 REINFORCEMENT:

A. Deformed steel bars shall conform to CSS Section 52, ASTM A615, Grade 60 or better and shall

be of U.S.A. domestic manufacturers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify grading has brought subgrade to proper elevation.

B. Report any discrepancies in Drawings, conditions at the site, or prior work done by others which

would prevent positive drainage or would produce unsatisfactory concrete work.

C. Ensure all underground work and embedded items are in place.

3.2 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Place, spread, moisture condition, and compact in accordance with Section 31 05 13.




3.3 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. Notify the College’s Representative at least 48 hours prior to placing concrete.

B. Place Concrete in accordance with this section.

C. All concrete work shall be true to line and grade as indicated on the drawings. Follow the intent

of drainage patterns indicated; any surface which does not drain properly will be rejected.

D. Finished paving surfaces shall not vary more than 1/8" from a 10' metal straightedge, except at

grade changes. No "birdbaths" or other surface irregularities will be permitted. Correct

irregularities to the satisfaction of the College's Representative at no additional cost to the

College.

E. Tooled weakened plane joints shall be set at 20 foot intervals with a depth of 1/3 the slab

thickness.

F. Concrete walkways with gradients less than 5% (1:20) shall have a light broom finish.

G. Concrete ramps with gradients between 5% (1:20) and 8.33% (1:12) shall have a medium broom

finish.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Conform to applicable requirements of CSS Section 90-8.

B. Protect all concrete work against injury and defacement during subsequent construction

operations until Final Acceptance.

3.5 CURING

A. All concrete shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 7 days prior to any loading.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The College’s Geotechnical Engineer will inspect subgrade and any required bases prior to

placement of concrete.

B. The College’s Testing Agency will take samples for testing during the course of the work in

accordance with the Contract Documents or as considered necessary.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100 - 1

SECTION 033100 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.

1. General Contractor shall review and coordinate shop drawings prior to providing them to

Architect or Engineer for review.

2. Provide a minimum of one full sized and one half sized paper copy of shop drawings for

review by the Structural Engineer.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.



E. Samples: For vapor retarder.


A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Bonding agents.

7. Adhesives.

8. Vapor retarders.

9. Repair materials.

B. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified

tolerances.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature

range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of

ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is

Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301.

2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for #5 bars and larger and Grade 40 for #4 bars and

smaller, deformed.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.



2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal for foundations and ¾ for slabs.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened

concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017.

F. Water: Potable.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Water vapor Transmission Rate =

0.006gr/ft^2/hr as tested per ASTM E96. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or

pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Stego Industries LLC, Stego Wrap (15-mil). San Juan Capistrano, CA 877-

464-7834 or approved equal.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,

Type 1, Class A.

1. CS2000 as manufactured by Creteseal, P.O. Box 18958, Anaheim, CA, 92718, 800-278-

4270 or approved equal.

2. Curing and sealing compounds shall comply with the testing and product requirements of

the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and



Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using

Environmental Chambers."

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches.

4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch.

B. Slabs-on-Grade and Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches.

4. Maximum Aggregate Size: ¾ inch.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94,

and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time to 60 minutes.



2.13 Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods:

1. Stainless steel 8-18 anchor bolts.

2. Stainless steel A304 anchor rods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure

can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.



3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new

form-release agent.

B. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces

unless approved by Architect.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld

crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps

of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.



3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-

fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch wide joints into concrete when cutting

action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops

random contraction cracks.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit

concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have

begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to

consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded

items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.



4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits

on formed-surface irregularities.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-

floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch

in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious

floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or

inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing,

built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of

trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-

finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft. long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed

anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.



E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry

tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly

scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-

place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete the Work.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather

protection during curing.

B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder

of curing period.

C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

D. Typical at floors and slabs: Apply CS2000 in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions:

1. Apply the day concrete is placed or as soon as harsh weather permits, prior to any other

chemical treatment.

2. Schedule manufacturer’s technician to be on site the day concrete is placed and as needed

thereafter to install or train in application. The technician shall document that every

application has been installed using acceptable procedures.

3. Apply to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete and the

concrete has hardened sufficiently to sustain foot traffic without damage.

4. Spray at a rate of 200 square feet per gallon unless specifically noted otherwise by the

manufacturer’s printed literature. Lightly broom product evenly over the substrate until

product has completely penetrated the surface.

5. If within 2 hours after the initial application areas are subjected to heavy rainfall and

puddling occurs, reapply CS2000 product to these areas as soon as weather permits.

Manufacturer’s technician shall be kept informed.



3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and

replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2

parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of

cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes

and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding

agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place

with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.

Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before

proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than

surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as slabs, for finish and verify

surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to

drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges

to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor

elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,

square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.

Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without



coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.


A. Testing and Inspection: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and

inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50

cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not

less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests

when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F

and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens

at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

7. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain

Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete

testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive

strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking

strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

8. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

9. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency



may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.

10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

11. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.

C. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of

finishing.



PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1

SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs.

2. Room-identification signs.

B. Signage types:

1. Building signage including:

a. Tactile exit signs

b. International Symbol of Accessibility

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

B. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by

other installers.

B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other

installers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and

accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and

layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.



D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the

required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square, including corner.

2. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.

3. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by

other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials

or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.

c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface

temperature changes.



B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and

2013 California Building Code including Section 11B-216 and 11B-703 for signs.

1. Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs: Raised characters shall be raised 1/32 inch minimum

above their background. Characters shall be sans serif type, upper case and 5/8 inch minimum

to 2 inch maximum in height. Characters shall be accompanied by contracted Grade 2 Braille.

Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the

pictogram. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6 inch minimum height.

2. Contracted Grade 2 Braille shall be used wherever Braille is required in other portions of these

standards. Dots shall be 1/10 inch (2.54 mm) on centers in each cell with 2/10-inch (5.08 mm)

space between cells, measured from the second column of dots in the first cell to the first

column of dots in the second cell. Dots shall be raised a minimum of 1/40 inch (0.635 mm)

above the background.

3. Finish and Contrast: Characters and background of signs shall have a non-glare finish.

Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background with either light characters on a

dark background or dark characters on a light background.

4. Symbol color: the International Symbol of Accessibility used on sign shall consist of a white

figure on a blue background. The blue shall be equal to color no. 15090 in Federal Standard

595B.

5. Tactile Exit Signs: Comply with Section 1011.7 for locations and specific text.

2.2 SIGNS

A. Manufacturer:

a. ASI Sign Systems Inc., dba ASI

b. ASAP Signs & Printing, Salinas

c. Approved Equal.

B. Exterior & Interior Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters

having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Solid-Sheet Sign: Acrylic sheet with finish specified in "Surface Finish and Applied Graphics"

Subparagraph below and as follows:

a. Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.03 mm).

2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition, Square cut.

b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

3. Mounting: Unframed; Surface mounted with mechanical fasteners to wall and two-face tape.

4. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics:

a. Integral Acrylic Sheet Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

b. Painted Finish and Graphics: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, in color as

selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

c. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating.

5. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille with typeface as selected by

Architect from manufacturer's full range and variable content as scheduled. Finish raised

characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1069&mf=04&src=wd



6. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions

as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally

from corner to corner.

2.3 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV

filtering).

B. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure-sensitive, permanent

adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated and suitable for exterior

applications.

C. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer

for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,

noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws

and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head, spanner-head or one-way-head slots unless

otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign

material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head

indicated, installed in predrilled holes.

5. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work.

B. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with

adhesive on both sides.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and

assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for

reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final

assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water

penetration and retention.



3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and

brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed

welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.

6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing

work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed

fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel surface

indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.

1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard baked enamel.

2. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard enamel.

3. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with manufacturer's standard enamel.

Apply manufacturer's standard opaque background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.

4. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to

expose contrasting core ply.

C. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce

precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.

D. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly

press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths.

E. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction

and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required.

1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to match

sign-background color color unless otherwise indicated.

2. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets with No. 4 finish unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long

dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but

before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or

irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.



C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces

free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would

impair installation.

4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated and

according to accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign.

Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced

adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and

nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.

Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through

fasteners and tighten.

3. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris.

Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of

sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place

sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

D. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Clean and dry substrate. Align sign characters in final position

before removing release liner. Remove release liner in stages, and apply and firmly press characters

into final position. Press from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths.

Remove carrier film without disturbing applied vinyl film.

E. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of

glass to conceal back of sign.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified

requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be

successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.



C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written

instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition

during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



GLAZED STRUCTURES 13123-1

NEXUS GREENHOUSE CO.® SPECIFICATIONS

FOR STEEL STRUCTURES AND ACRYLIC COVERING

SECTION 13123

NEXUS GREENHOUSE CO.

10983 LEROY DR.,

NORTHGLENN, CO 80233

TOLL FREE (800) 228-9639, EXT 536

FAX (303) 457-2801

SECTION 13123

GREENHOUSE

PART 1 GENERAL



1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Greenhouses.

B. Accessories.

C. Glass and Glazing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: Cast-in-place concrete foundations, slabs, and walls.

B. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers.

C. Section 08411 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront: Door specifications.

D. Section 15000 – Plumbing and Mechanical

E. Section 16000 – Electrical

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 611 – Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

B. ASTM A 36/A 36M – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

D. ASTM B 308/b 308M – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles.

E. ASTM C 864 – Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,

and Spacers.

F. AWS D1 – Structural Welding Code.

G. NGMA - National Greenhouse Manufacturer’s Association, Standards - 1998 Edition

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Submit structural calculations for greenhouses signed and sealed by Professional Engineer licensed in the

project state for review by the Architect.

B. Structural Performance: Except as noted, and at the minimum, conform to the requirements and

recommendations of both the “Standard for Design Loads in Greenhouse Structures” and its “Commentary”

published by the National Greenhouse Manufacturers Association, 1998 Edition (NGMA Standards).

Greenhouse frame shall be designed in accordance with the American Institute of Steel Construction

Specifications, American Iron and Steel Institute Specifications and/or ( Name of Building Code ).

C. Design Loads

1. Design structure to carry the following loads:

a. Risk Category III

b. Dead Load: Structure and Equipment

c. Ground Snow Load: 0 lbs./sq. ft.

d. Wind Speed: 115 mph, exp. C

e. Special Loads: (If Applicable) ____

f. Applicable Building Code is the 2016 California Building Code with state or local amendments

and ASCE 7-10.



2. Load Combinations per ASCE 7:

a. Allowable Strength Design:

D + Lr

D + 0.6W

0.6D + 0.6W

D + 0.7E

D + 0.75Lr + 0.75(0.6W)

D + 0.75Lr + 0.75(0.7E)

b. Load and Resistance Factor Design:

1.2D + 1.6Lr

0.9D + 1.0W

0.9D + 1.0E

1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.5W

1.2D + 1.6W + 0.5Lr

1.2D + 1.0E + 0.2S

D. Engineering Certification

1. Provide written structural analysis prepared and certified by a Professional Structural Engineer licensed

in the State of California, that the greenhouse meets the above-specified loads.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with provisions of Section: ____________of these specifications.

B. Product data: Within 30 days after award of the contract, submit Manufacturer’s product specifications,

technical product data, standard data, and installation recommendations for each component.

C. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of greenhouse, including the

following:

1. Elevations.

2. Detail section of typical framing members.

3. Hardware, mounting heights.

4. Anchorage and reinforcements.

5. Glazing details.

6. Placement of all components for heating, cooling, and ventilation.

1.6 GENERAL

A. It is the intent of this portion of the specifications to include the furnishing and erection of the greenhouse

superstructure including all glazing, doors & door hardware and ventilation as shown on plans and/or

hereinafter described such work to be the responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer. Greenhouse

installation is the responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer and shall be included with bid on bid day.

Material only bids will not be accepted. Bids received after the bid date shall be considered non-responsive

and shall not be accepted.

B. It is not the intent of this portion of the specifications to cover concrete, grouting, masonry work, plumbing,

electrical work (power and control wiring), utility connections, final cleaning of glazing or counter

flashing. This portion of the work shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor or his selected

Subcontractors other than the Greenhouse Manufacturer.

C. No masonry of foundation installation shall be made prior to approval of greenhouse drawings. Approved

greenhouse drawings shall be used to make all masonry and foundation installations. Dimensions may vary

slightly from contract drawings to accommodate manufacturer’s standard, but total area shall not be less

than 98% of that shown.



D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete floors, grouting of sills and base plates, and masonry walls: Division 03 and 04

2. Plumbing rough-in work and hook-up of greenhouse plumbing systems, and downspouts described in

this section: Division 22

3. Electrical power wiring, environmental control system wiring, lighting, conduit and hook-ups of

greenhouse electrical equipment provided under this section: Division 26


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in fabrication and

erection of glazed structures for similar projects.

B. Installer Qualifications: Greenhouse installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the erection of

glazed structures for similar projects.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer’s directions and as

required to prevent damage or deterioration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GREENHOUSE MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design: Vail, Steel Greenhouse by Nexus Greenhouse Corporation., 10983 Leroy Dr., Northglenn,

CO 80233. Tel. (800) 228-9639, ext 536 . Fax. (303)457-2801. Email: [email protected]

www.nexuscorp.com.

B. Must be a member, in good standing, of the National Greenhouse Manufacturer’s Association (NGMA).

2.2 GREENHOUSE

A. Components

1. Primary structural members shall be fabricated from square galvanized steel tubing with a minimum

45,000 p.s.i. tensile strength. No roll formed sections allowed.

2. Aluminum extrusions used for bars, vents and other secondary framing members shall be 6063-T6

alloy.

3. Roof trusses shall be factory welded using square galvanized tubing. Minimum sizing are 2” square,

16 ga. top and bottom chords and 1 ½” square, 18 ga. secondary members. Welds will be re-

galvanized with a flame spray process. No painting of welded areas.

4. Columns shall be fabricated from 4” square galvanized steel tubing.

5. Truss to column connection will be made with a column cap and gutter saddle assembly made from

Tenzaloy, a high strength alloy.

6. Roof purlins shall be fabricated from 2” square 15 ga. galvanized steel tubing as a minimum. The

purlins shall have a swaged end for a continuous purlin connection. Purlins shall be bolted to truss top

chords. No screw attachments are allowed.

7. Gutters shall be galvanized steel with a baked-on enamel paint on the exterior side as an extra coating.

The gutter will be designed for water drainage only. No fixed truss or bow attachments are allowed.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.nexuscorp.com/



8. Horizontal and vertical framing shall be fabricated from 2” square, 16 ga. tube minimum.

9. Glazing extrusions for structured sheeting shall be made of aluminum and consistent with

manufacturer’s standard shapes. A two-piece gasketed extrusion shall be used on roof areas and a one-

piece extrusion on vertical areas. Extrusions are complete with necessary accessories for greenhouse

construction.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. Square Galvanized Tubing: ASTM A500

2. Sheets: Roll Formed ASTM A36

3. Plates: ASTM A36

B. Aluminum:

1. Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 or 6063-HS

2. Sheet: Alloy 3003-H14.

3. Plates: Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-HS.

C. Fasteners:

1. Bolts: ASTM A307

2. Self-Drill Screws: AISI C 1022

3. Self-Tapping Cap Screws: AISI C 1018SS

4. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A304 Stainless Steel All-Thread Rod with Epoxy Adhesive or Expansion

Anchor

D. Glazing

1. Glazing panels shall be 8mm clear twin wall acrylic. Glazing panels for West slope of each greenhouse

roof (excluding ridge vent panels) shall be LUMO solar panels, electrical connections of LUMO

panels by others

2. Panels shall be furnished in continuous sections on each slope of the roof and on sidewall and gable

end areas.

3. Glazing for roof and gable ends of lean to structure shall be 8 mm clear twin wall acrylic, sidewall

shall be Econet 1535 insect screen.

E. Glazing System

1. Glazing extrusions for structured sheeting shall be made of aluminum and consistent with

Manufacturer’s standard shapes.

2. A two piece gasketed aluminum extrusion shall be used on roof areas. Glazing caps shall be gasketed

and extend in one piece from the eave to the ridge. One piece, non-gasketed, aluminum extrusions

may be used on vertical areas.

3. Extrusions are to be provided and installed complete with necessary accessories for greenhouse

construction.

F. Glazing Seals for Acrylic Covering:

1. External glazing tape shall be applied to the acrylic sheets as recommended by Manufacturer.

2. EPDM rubber gasket of type recommended by Manufacturer shall be installed in the glazing caps.

3. GE silicone sealant or equivalent shall be applied in accordance with Manufacturer’s

recommendations.

G. Fasteners:

1. Non-load bearing screws and bolts shall be 18-8 stainless steel or 2024-T4 aluminum. All structure

fasteners shall be A325 high strength, hot-dipped galvanized bolts.



H. Greenhouse Doors and Frames: Provide heavy duty, steel clad service door, Plyco Series 88, white or

bronze insulated door panel; 24 gauge baked enamel finish; 4” x 4” stainless steel hinges and aluminum

threshold and ADA accessible levers.

I. Insect Screens: Provide accordion style ridge vent screens with Econet 1535 insect screen

2.4 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Vents: Provide sash of size indicated on drawings, designed to open out in a continuous operation from end

to end and with a weather tight hinge and weather tight fit between sash and vent header.

B. Vent Motors: Motors to operate each vent indicated on drawings and as recommended by Manufacturer.

C. Exhaust Fans:

1. Exhaust fans shall be steel, aluminum or fiberglass construction.

2. Motors, single phase shall be totally enclosed air over (TEAO), shall be thermally protected and have

total sealed ball bearings.

3. Blade construction shall be of stamped painted carbon steel, stamped aluminum or cast aluminum.

4. Shutters shall be constructed of all aluminum, galvanized steel frame with aluminum shutter blades or

aluminum frame with PVC shutter blades

5. Fans shall have test data from an independent testing facility such as BESS labs or AMCA.

6. American Coolair AL36K aluminum, slant wall housing exhaust fans, 2 each one speed, 2 each two

speed.

D. Evaporative Pad System: The evaporative pad system will consist of pads made of:

1. Pads made of cross-fluted cellulose paper, impregnated with insoluble anti-rot salts and stiffening

agents.

2. A water distribution system consisting of a distribution pipe (1.5” diameter PVC pipe with metered

outlet holes), spray deflectors; an aluminum or PVC return system and a sump pump adequate for the

systems length.

3. A standard plumbing package consisting of a float valve, filter, PVC fitting, bleed off valve and piping

from the pump to the water distribution pipe.

4. A submersible or centrifugal pump of heavy-duty construction, sized for the system to supply at least

½ gallon of water per minute per linear foot of pad system.

5. PVD or aluminum end panels hall enclose the pads at the ends of the system. Aluminum flashing shall

be installed to prevent air leaks around the system.

6. A PVC self-contained system includes a sump tank utilizing a 12” diameter or larger PVC tank

connected to the collection trough.

7. American Coolair 36” x 46’ x 6” PVC pad system

E. Intake Shutters: Mechanically operated intake shutters of size indicated on drawings and as recommended

by Manufacturer. American Coolair LFS6036E motorized shutters over evaporative pad system

F. Horizontal Airflow Fans: Mechanically operated fans indicated on drawings and as recommended by

Manufacturer. 6 each 12” haf fans

G. Heating Systems:

1. Unit Heaters: A minimum of an 80% high efficiency unit shall be used. A stainless-steel tubular heat

exchanger with a 15-year warranty is required. The model shall use direct drive fans for air

distribution. 2 each Modine PTC156A unit heaters.

H. Energy/Shade Curtains: A truss to truss, push/pull system using a rack and pinion drive will be used. The

curtain will have a slope/flat/slope profile following the roofline and creating an “attic” space above the

middle of the house for energy efficiency. The curtain is to be supported by guidewires, not suspension

hooks. No wire or cable drives are allowed. Shade cloth will be Aluminet 50% ICFR



I. Environmental Controls/Computers: Wadsworth Control Systems Seed Controller with custom contactor

panel and wiring diagrams, Seed software, alarm manager/ auto dialer

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components in accordance with shop drawings. Shop fabricate to greatest extent practical to

minimize field cutting, splicing, and assembly.

B. Welding:

1. Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society.

2. Welds shall be re-galvanized with a flame spray process, no painting of welded areas.

C. Fabricate components to allow for accurate fit of joints and corners.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which greenhouse work is to be installed. Notify Contractor in writing

of conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation of work.

B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting diagrams, templates and directions for installation of

anchorages. Coordinated delivery of such items to project site.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Drilling and setting of anchor bolts is to be by Greenhouse Installer.

B. Erect greenhouse and related components in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions and final

shop and erection drawings.

C. Greenhouse Installer is responsible for all unloading of greenhouse materials, systems, equipment and to

provide any lift or installation equipment required.

D. Greenhouse Installer shall have not less than 5 years’ experience installing work of similar size and scope.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. General: Install equipment in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recognized

industry practices to insure intended function.

B. Equipment will be installed in place by the Greenhouse Installer.

C. All mechanical connections (electrical or plumbing) will be performed by electrical, plumbing, or

mechanical contractors.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Structural: All products manufactured by Greenhouse Manufacturer shall be new and guaranteed free from

defects in material and workmanship for one year from customer receipt.

B. Equipment: All supplied coverings and equipment will carry their manufacturer’s respective warranties.





FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL 21 00 00 - 1

SECTION 21 00 00 – FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are hereby a part of

this Section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing of all labor,

materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to,

providing and installing complete fire protection systems, and other work as shown

or indicated in the Fire Protection Drawings and Specifications.

B. Consult all other Sections to determine the extent and character of this work specified

elsewhere.

C. Specifically refer to the following:

Section 21 05 00 Overhead Fire Protection Systems

Section 21 10 00 Underground Fire Service

D. Make all connections to equipment requiring service from systems installed under

this Section.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Before submitting a bid for the fire protection work the Contractor shall visit the site

and become familiar with all the work on other related Drawings and Specifications,

and plan the work to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of all

trades. No additional costs will be considered for work which has to be relocated due

to conflicts with other trades.

B. If, after examination of the bidding documents relating to the work, the Contractor

has queries concerning the nature and scope of the work or intent of the

Specifications, he/she shall promptly request clarification from the Architect. After

contract award, claims of ignorance of the intent and scope of the contract shall not

be allowed.

C. Contractor is responsible for coordinating the schedule of inspections by Engineer at

appropriate stages of construction such as rough-in, pre-final, and final, and at other

times required by the Specifications or by the construction. Notify Architect and

Engineer seven (7) days in advance of proposed site visit. Notification constitutes

certification that construction is, or will be, complete and ready for inspection.

D. Coordination Drawings: All work of this section must be coordinated to clear all

work of other sections. Provide coordination drawings for all work of this



section/division; see Division 01. For site utilities, see architectural drawings for

additional coordination requirements.

1.4 SAFETY

A. Contractors must conduct a weekly safety meeting with their employees and provide

documentation as to attendance and topics of discussion. Engineer's construction

support services do not constitute review or approval of Contractor's safety

procedures. Contractor shall comply with all OSHA regulations. Contractor is

required to obtain and pay for insurance required to cover all activities within

Contractor's Scope of Work.

1.5 BUILDING LAWS

A. Fire Protection work shall conform to all requirements prescribed by governmental

bodies having jurisdiction and is to be in accordance with the California Building

Code; all federal, state, and local codes and ordinances; all OSHA requirements;

California Plumbing Code, California Mechanical Code, California Fire Code, and

National Fire Protection Association; California State Code Title 8, Title 21, Title 24;

and the Energy Conservation Standards.

B. Should any part of the design fail to comply with such requirements, the discrepancy

shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to submitting bid.

C. Should there be any direct conflict between the Drawings and/or Specifications and

the above rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence.

However, when the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement, or construction is

of a superior quality or capacity to that required by above rules and regulations, the

Drawings and/or Specifications shall take precedence. Rulings and interpretations of

enforcing agencies shall be considered as part of the regulations.

D. After a Contract is awarded, if minor changes or additions are required by the

aforementioned authorities, even though such work is not shown on Drawings or

overtly covered in the Specifications, they must be included at the Contractor's

expense.

E. The Contractor is responsible to coordinate and make adjustments in his/her work

with the full set of Contract Drawings and Specifications.

F. All piping, and equipment shall be securely anchored to building structure as required

herein and by the California Building Code and NFPA 13.

1.6 UNDERGROUND CONNECTIONS

A. See Section 21 10 00 for Underground Fire Service connection requirements.

1.7 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION WATER

A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and provide necessary facilities for the

temporary construction water from the Owner's source. Costs for the temporary

construction water shall be paid for by Owner.



1.8 PAINTING

A. See Section 09 for painting of piping, equipment, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials used shall be new as listed in subheadings and indicated on Drawings.

Inspect all materials and immediately remove defective materials from the site.

B. All electrical materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the Underwriters'

Laboratories (UL), unless the material is of a type for which label or listing service is

not provided.

C. Substitution:

1. No substitute materials or equipment may be installed without the written

approval of the Architect.

2. Use of substitute materials or equipment may require changes in associated

materials and equipment. Contractor shall submit detailed Shop Drawings and

installation instructions of substitute materials and equipment to Architect for

approval. Such submittals shall address all changes required in other items.

3. All additional costs incurred by the substitution of material or equipment, or

the installation thereof whether Architectural, Structural, Mechanical,

Plumbing, or Electrical shall be borne by the Contractor who substitutes the

materials or equipment in place of the items specified.

D. Quality of Materials: Pipe fittings and equipment may be taken from stock but the

Contractor will be required to submit manufacturer's certificates identifying the

material and equipment furnished as conforming with these Specifications and such

codes and standards as apply to the equipment specified. Any material on the site

which cannot be identified by manufacturer's mark shall be removed from the site at

Architect’s request.

2.2 SUBMITTALS

A. The review of submittals and approval thereof by the Architect does not relieve the

Contractor from compliance with the requirements and intentions of the Drawings

and Specifications to which the submittals pertain. The contractor acknowledges its

responsibility to submit complete shop drawings and other required submittals.

Incomplete submittals will be returned to the contractor unreviewed.

B. No item shall be installed without having been submitted and reviewed without

comment. Should the Contractor install items that have not been submitted and

reviewed, the work shall be changed at Contractor's own expense when so ordered by

the Architect.

C. Material List: An itemized list of material and equipment which the Contractor

proposes to use shall be submitted to the Architect with number of copies indicated

and within time indicated.



D. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit all required Shop Drawings, product data, etc. at one time. Submittals

shall be bound, tabbed, and properly indexed by Specification Section.

2. Each item shall be identified by manufacturer, brand, and trade name; model

number, size, rating, and whatever other data is necessary to properly identify

and verify the materials and equipment. The words "AS SPECIFIED" will not

be considered sufficient information.

3. Each submittal shall bear the Contractor's stamp and mark indicating the

Contractor has reviewed and approved the submittal.

4. Each submitted item shall refer to the Specification Section and paragraph in

which the item is specified.

5. Accessories, controls, finish, etc. not required to be submitted or identified

with the submitted equipment shall be furnished and installed as specified.

6. Submittals shall be all inclusive with all items requiring submittals being

submitted at the same time; individual submittals will not be accepted.

7. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction

schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not

ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to

complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with

any special handling charges, shall be borne by Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Drawings show the general arrangement and location of the piping and

equipment. Work shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings, except for

changes required by conflicts with the work of other trades. The Contractor shall

provide for the support, expansion, and pitch of any rearranged piping in

conformance with the intent of the Drawings, Specifications, and codes.

B. Note that certain fire protection work is shown, wholly or in part, on Architectural

Drawings.

C. The contractor shall field verify existing conditions and provide accurate shop

coordination drawings for coordination with other trades in accordance with Division

1.

D. Fire Protection Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show the approximate

location of equipment and piping. Dimensions shown on Drawings shall take

precedence over scaled dimensions on Drawings. All dimensions shall be verified in

the field by the Contractor.

E. The exact location of apparatus, equipment, and piping shall be ascertained from the

Architect or the Architect’s representative in the field, and work shall be laid out

accordingly. Should the Contractor fail to ascertain such locations the work shall be

changed at Contractor's own expense when so ordered by the Architect. The

Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of piping and

equipment up to the time of installation without additional cost.



F. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications that, where certain items such as

unions, expansion joints, and other mechanical components are not shown, but where

such items are required by the nature of the work, shall be furnished and installed.

G. The Fire Protection Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement each

other. Any material or labor called for in one shall be furnished even though not

specifically mentioned in the other.

H. Pipe sizes shown are the minimum allowable and shall be increased in size if

required by code or wherever necessary to meet unusual conditions.

3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Drawings shall be maintained at all times showing the exact location of

piping mains, branches, valves, drains, etc. installed under all Sections. Obtain from

the Architect, at cost, a complete set of prints. On these prints systematically and

accurately keep a dimensional record of all work installed different from those shown

on Drawings. Have these Drawings readily available for reference.

B. Record Set: When above information is complete and acceptable to the Architect

transfer this information accurately to reproducible tracings, purchased at cost from

the Architect for this purpose, and deliver to the Architect for final review.

C. Upon completion of the Architect’s review of the Record Set the Contractor shall

incorporate changes, as noted on the record set, including dimensions such as

elevations, valves, etc. Deliver transparencies with one (1) set of prints to the

Architect. Deliver one (1) complete set of prints to building Owner within ninety (90)

days of issuance of final occupancy report.

D. Inspector's Approval: Where a full-time inspector is employed by the Owner, the

Record Drawing information shall be reviewed by the inspector during the course of

construction and shall have the inspector's approval before submission to the

Architect.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. Documentation on standard NFPA Acceptance forms and inspection documents shall

be submitted to the Architect and DSA Inspector of Record.

B. The required acceptance documents shall be signed by a licensed C-16 Contractor.

3.4 DAMAGE

A. Repair any damage to the building, premises, and equipment occasioned by the work

under this Section.

B. Repair all damage to any part of the building or premises caused by leaks or breaks in

pipe, or malfunctions of equipment furnished or installed under this Section until the

warranty period expiration date.



3.5 COMPLETE WORKING INSTALLATION

A. The Drawings and Specifications do not attempt to list every item that must be

installed. When an item is necessary for the satisfactory operation of equipment, is

required by the equipment manufacturer, or accepted as good practice, furnish

without change in Contract cost.

3.6 STORAGE

A. Provide proper protection and storage of all items and tools required for this work.

3.7 QUALITY OF WORK

A. The quality of work shall be of a standard generally accepted in the respective trade.

Use only experienced, competent, and properly equipped workers. Replace work

falling below this standard as directed by the Architect.

B. Systems shall be worked into a complete and integrated arrangement with like

elements arranged to make a neat appearing and finished piece of work, with

adequate head room and passageway free from obstructions. Such systems shall be

installed by laborers experienced in the respective trades involved.

3.8 CONCRETE WALLS AND CONCRETE FOOTINGS

A. Where pipes must pass through concrete walls and footings, they shall pass through

Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves set in place at time of construction. The sleeves shall

provide clearance in accordance with NFPA 13

B. Coordinate core drilled openings with Architect and General Contractor.

Coordination shall include location, size, and spacing of openings. No slot openings

will be allowed. Coordinate openings to avoid critical structural items such as

reinforcing bars, tensioning tendons, etc.

C. Also see Paragraph 3.15.

3.9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - CONTROLS AND COORDINATION WITH

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor on

furnishing and installing of controls, motors, starters, etc. Coordinate means

informing Electrical Contractor of items requiring electrical connection, providing

copies of submittal data, installation data, scheduling work to insure efficient

progress, and promptly supplying those items to be installed by Electrical Contractor.

B. The specific requirements for electrical power and/or devices for each and every

piece of fire protection equipment requiring electrical service, supplied and/or

installed under this Contract, shall be coordinated and verified with the Fire

Protection Drawings, Fire Protection Sections of these Specifications, and with the

manufacturers of the equipment supplied. This shall include the voltage, phase, and

ampacity; conduit requirements; and exact location and type of disconnect, control,

and/or connection required. Any changes from the Drawings and Specifications

required as a result of this coordination shall be part of this Contract.



C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the following for all mechanical

equipment:

1. Conduit and wiring for line voltage power to the equipment.

2. Disconnect switches.

D. The work under this Section shall include furnishing and installing all controls on

low and manual line voltage, including thermostats, auxiliary switches, relay wiring,

interlock wiring; equipment control panels and transformers; and controls conduit

unless specifically indicated as part of other work. Materials and methods of the

control installation shall be in accordance with the Electrical Specifications.

E. The Fire Protection Contractor shall review all wiring connections which have any

influence on this equipment or work and verify that these connections are correct

before permitting any equipment to be operated which is furnished, installed, or

modified under this Contract.

3.10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED

UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Motors and motor control equipment shall conform to the standards of the National

Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Motors and motor control equipment

shall be as specified below. The work under this Section shall include:

1. Furnishing all motors, magnetic starters and automatic control devices for

equipment furnished and installed by this Contractor. Electrical Contractor

shall provide magnetic starters at motor control center where indicated.

2. Installation of the above motors and control devices. Manual motor starters

shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor in accordance with

Electrical Specifications.

3. Furnishing and installing line and/or low voltage interlock wiring shall be by

the Mechanical Contractor. Installation of wire includes the connection of

devices. All work shall be in accordance with the materials and methods

specified in the Electrical Specifications.

4. Furnishing and installing completely wired equipment control panels with

complete controls for automatic operation where indicated or when supplied

with equipment.

5. Furnishing and installing all control and interlock wiring from equipment

control panels to related remote devices, fans, motors, heaters, and controls.

6. Wire mounted on heat producing appliances shall be Type RHH or THHN

(90°C).

7. Except as noted above, disconnect switches, power circuits from electrical

panelboard to disconnect switch, starters, and motors shall be furnished and

installed under the Electrical Specifications.

3.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM PRECAUTIONS

A. Piping shall not be installed in any switchgear room, transformer vault, telephone

room or electric closet except as indicated. In any case, no piping shall be installed in

the space equal to the width and depth of any electrical service equipment,

switchboards, panel boards, or motor control centers and extending from the floor to



a height of six feet above the equipment or to the structural ceiling, whichever is

lower. Only sprinkler piping serving the room may be installed in those rooms.

3.12 CUTTING AND REPAIRING

A. No cutting shall be done except with Architect’s approval. Cutting of structural

members or footings is prohibited without the prior written consent of the Structural

Engineer.

B. Where cutting of paving, walls, ceilings, etc. is necessary for the installation of the

mechanical work, it shall be done under the direction of this Section. Damage caused

by this cutting shall be repaired to match original and adjacent surfaces without

additional expense to the Owner. Cutting of new construction shall be by the

installing Contractor of that construction as directed by this Contractor.

3.13 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all piping contents with letter legend on color background identifying hazard

or use of material.

B. The pipe marker system shall conform completely with "The Scheme for

Identification of Piping Systems" (ANSI A13.1, latest edition). More specifically, the

pipe marker must possess the following:

1. ANSI specified color coded background.

2. ANSI specified color of legend in relation to background color.

3. ANSI specified legend letter size.

4. ANSI specified length of color field (marker length).

C. The following tables will serve to clarify the above mentioned requirements:

TABLE 1

Outside Diameter

of Pipe or

Covering

Length of

Color

Field

Size of

Letters

3/4" to 1 1/4" 8" 1/2"

1 1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"

2 1/2" to 6" 12" 1 1/4"

8" to 10" 24" 2 1/2"

Over 10" 32" 3 1/2"

D. All pipes 3/4" I.D. and smaller shall be marked with 1 1/2" brass tags equivalent to

valve tags.

E. Provide flow markers consisting of labels similar to pipe markers with a large black

arrow printed on same background color to indicate direction of flow.



F. Place pipe marker and flow marker on each pipe on both sides of walls or floors

through which pipes pass. Place markers adjacent to valves and fittings or branch

take-off and for exposed piping locate markers to be clearly visible to person

standing on floor, and at not over 30'-0" intervals on all straight runs of pipe.

G. All valves under 3/4" I.D.: 18 gauge brass identification tags 1 1/2" in diameter with

depressed 1/2" high black filled letters above 1/2" black filled numbers. Tags shall be

fastened securely at specified locations. Valve tags shall show valve number,

purpose, and normal condition (open or closed).

H. Tag Locations:

1. Adjacent to each valve and fitting except on plumbing fixtures and equipment.

2. At each branch and riser take-off.

3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor, and ceiling construction.

4. At each pipe passage to underground.

5. On all horizontal pipe runs, marked every 25'-0".

3.14 VALVE TAGS AND CHART

A. Furnish and install in each mechanical room a single typed valve chart identifying all

valves with their respective tag numbers, size, manufacturer, model number, service,

and indicating whether each valve is normally open or normally closed. Chart shall

be mounted in a neat sheetmetal frame with glass front. The frame shall be arranged

so that valve chart is removable. Provide three (3) additional copies of valve chart in

maintenance manuals.

3.15 SLEEVES AND SEALING

A. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through new floors, walls, partitions, and any

other building construction, of adequate diameter to allow minimum clearance all

around between sleeve and pipe as required by NFPA 13.

B. Lay out work prior to concrete forming. Reinforce sleeves to prevent collapse during

forming and curing.

C. All floor sleeves required shall extend 1" above finished floor except through

mechanical equipment room floors and shafts where sleeves shall extend 2" above

finished floor level. Wall sleeves shall be flush with face of wall unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Sleeves shall permit free thermal expansion of pipe without binding or contact with

structure.

E. Do not support pipes by resting pipe clamps on floor sleeves. Supplementary

members shall be provided so pipes are floor supported.

F. Special sleeves detailed on Drawings shall take precedence over this Section.

G. Pipe sleeves as scheduled below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Plaster or Drywall:



Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

2. Concrete or Masonry Walls and Concrete Bases:

See Paragraph 3.8.

3. Waterproof membraned floors, walls, concrete pits, foundation walls, etc. as

detailed or specified in Section 22 05 00.

3.16 SUPPORTS

A. All supports and bracing shall comply with NFPA 13.

B. All equipment and piping shall be mounted on, or suspended from, foundations and

supports as specified and indicated, and seismically braced to structure.

C. Seismic restraints shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13.

D. All piping and equipment shall be securely anchored to building structure as required

by the Specifications, California Title 24, the California Building Code, and NFPA

13.

E. Earthquake restraints shall be capable of resisting the gravity lateral loads required by

NFPA 13.

F. Supplemental Supports: Provide supplemental supports to span building structural

elements as necessary for equipment foundations and supports. Provide Shop

Drawings to Mechanical and Structural Engineers for approval prior to installation.

3.17 ACCESSIBILITY

A. General: Valves, pressure gauges, and indicating equipment or specialties requiring

reading, adjusting, inspection, repairing, removal, or replacement shall be

conveniently and accessibly located with reference to finished building. Gauges shall

be installed to be easily read from floor.

B. Panels: No unions, flanges, valves, controls, or equipment shall be placed in a

location that will be inaccessible after the system is complete. Access panels or doors

shall be provided where required whether or not shown on Drawings.

C. Access Panels in Walls or Ceilings:

1. Provide access panels in walls or ceilings where indicated and where required

to provide access to valves, dampers, and other appurtenances. Panels shall be

style as selected by Architect and as directed by wall or ceiling construction.

Panel size shall be 24" x 24" unless indicated otherwise. Panels in acoustical

barriers shall have same transmission loss as barrier. Panels in rated

construction shall have same rating as construction in which installed.

2. Door panels shall be no lighter than 14 gauge steel. Doors shall be equipped

with concealed spring hinges and flush, screwdriver operated locks, except that

key operated locks shall be used for all access doors in walls where door is

within 6'-0" of floor. Locks for all key operated doors shall be keyed alike.

3. Doors in ceramic tile surfaces shall be stainless steel or chrome plated. Doors

in other finished surfaces shall be prime coated.



D. Equipment Spaces: Provide aisles between equipment and piping, electrical gear, etc.

for complete service and inspection of equipment. Maintain minimum 6'-6"

headroom in all access aisles. Maintain minimum 36" clearance at all service panels.

Provide minimum clearances at electrical equipment per NEC. Provide 36" wide,

3/4" thick plywood covered catwalks in attics from access door to equipment.

3.18 TESTING

A. Test all piping, equipment, and systems as called for in the Specifications. Notify

Architect and inspection authorities prior to testing so that they may be witnessed.

Protect all personnel and equipment during testing. Where Specifications do not

cover specific points or methods, conform to manufacturer's specifications.

3.19 EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be accurately set and leveled. Supports shall be neatly placed and

properly fastened. All equipment shall be fastened in place with bolts.

B. Keep all openings closed with plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter.

Protect all piping, fixtures, and equipment against dirt, water, chemical, or

mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any equipment or apparatus

damaged prior to final acceptance shall be restored to original condition or replaced

at the Architect’s discretion and at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Start-Up: Equipment shall be adjusted, lubricated, aligned, etc. prior to start-up.

Inspect each piece of equipment prior to start-up. Start each piece of equipment in

accordance with manufacturer's directions and warranty requirements.

D. Finish: Protect all equipment and materials until in use. Any visible rust or corrosion

shall be removed as directed prior to installation. All damaged factory painted

finishes shall be cleaned and painted with manufacturer provided paint.

3.20 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's

application and recommendations, requirements, and instructions, and in accordance

with Contract Documents. Where manufacturer's instructions differ from those

indicated or specified, they shall be brought to Architect’s attention for resolution

prior to equipment ordering and installation.

B. Where requirements indicated in Contract Documents exceed manufacturer's

requirements, Contract Documents shall govern.

3.21 FURRING AND PIPE SPACES

A. Spaces provided in the design of the building shall be utilized and the work shall be

kept within the furring lines established on the Drawings.

B. Layout: Maintain maximum head room under piping and equipment. Contractor to

coordinate line locations with beams, windows, etc. to provide maximum clearance.

From Drawings, ascertain heights of suspended ceilings and size of pipe shafts in

which piping is concealed, and location and size of structural members in and



adjacent to pipe shafts. Coordinate piping installation with ductwork, lighting, and

other equipment. Ensure necessary clearances on trim plates at exposed penetrations

of walls and floors. If sufficient room is not available above suspended ceiling or

vertical shafts obtain clarification from Architect before work is started.

3.22 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. General: All work, materials and methods used shall conform to the Drawings and

Specifications. NFPA 13 Guidelines shall be followed when specific details are not

shown on the Drawings. Anchorage of equipment for which specific details are not

shown on the Drawings shall be adequate to resist the forces based on the required

"CP" factor. Such anchorage shall be approved by the Architect, Structural Engineer,

and DSA

B. All supports shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and 2016 CBC.

C. Piping:

1. Pipe bracing system shall conform to the Drawings and to Specification

requirements hereinafter listed, or shall be a pre-approved manufacturer's

system such as Tolco Seismic Bracing System, or approved equal.

2. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating the location of all

seismic braces and provide a legend giving load information and model

specifications prior to installation. Such prearranged system shall conform to

requirements of the Specifications.

3. Brace all pipes with 2 1/2" I.D. and larger in accordance with NFPA 13.

4. Transverse bracings at 40'-0" on center maximum (minimum of one brace per

direction of run).

5. Longitudinal bracings at 80'-0" on center maximum (minimum of one brace per

direction of run).

6. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for

the pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within

24" of the elbow or tee and is connected to the largest pipe.

7. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines.

8. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or

expansion joints or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with

vibration isolators.

9. At vertical pipe risers, support the weight of the riser at a point or points above

the center of gravity of the riser wherever possible. Provide lateral guides at the

top and bottom of the riser and at intermediate points not to exceed 30'-0" on

center.

10. Provide large enough pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for

anticipated differential movements.

11. Do not fasten one rigid piping system to two dissimilar parts of the building

that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake (e.g., a wall and a

roof).

12. Cast iron piping systems are included in these requirements.

13. All trapeze hangers shall be braced.



3.23 CLEAN-UP

A. During the course of work under this Section, all rubbish, debris, surplus materials,

tools, etc. resulting from this work shall be removed from work area and shall be

disposed of off-site at the end of each working day. The Owner's premises shall be

left clean and in a condition acceptable to the Architect.

B. Clean all work installed under this Contract to satisfaction of Owner and submit

documentation that each system has been cleaned and results witnessed by the

Architect’s representative.

3.24 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish and install plastic laminated engraved nameplates in accordance with NFPA

13, the local Fire Marshal and DSA.

3.25 FINAL INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with certificates of final inspection and

approval from the inspection authorities having jurisdiction.

3.26 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the quality of all work and the quality of equipment

and materials in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and

Special Conditions. Should any defects occur during this period, the Contractor shall

promptly repair or replace defective items as directed by the Architect, without cost

to the Owner.

3.27 SITE VISITS BY ENGINEER

A. Engineer's responsibility is limited to normal construction support services only,

consisting of office consultation, site visits, and reports to the Architect at appropriate

stages of construction such as rough-in, pre-final, and final. All costs incurred by the

Engineer for additional site visits or office work required to complete the project as

the result of incomplete coordination or supervision by the Contractor or the

Mechanical Sub-Contractor shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.28 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Complete sets of bound instructions containing the manufacturer's operating and

maintenance instructions in accordance with specification section 21 05 00 Overhead

Fire Protection System:

B. Field Instructions: Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the

Owner the services of one or more competent Engineers shall be provided by the

Contractor to instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation and maintenance

of the systems. These field instructions shall cover all the items contained in the

bound instructions and shall be of a sufficient length and detailed nature, in the

Engineer's judgment, to insure safe and efficient operation.

**** END OF SECTION ****


OVERHEAD FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 05 00 - 1

SECTION 21 05 00 – OVERHEAD FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

GENERAL PART 1 -

1.1 GENERAL

A. The General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, Section 21 00 00, Fire

Protection General, and Division 1 are hereby a part of this Section as fully as if

repeated herein.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required for and/or reasonably

incidental to the completion of the complete hydraulic calculated sprinkler system

per NFPA 13 and other governing agencies.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required for and/or reasonably

incidental to the completion of the following work:

1. Sprinkler riser sized by hydraulic calculation complete with as detailed on the

drawings.

2. Complete hydraulic wet-pipe automatic fire sprinkler system through all

portions of the buildings. The systems shall be calculated for Light Hazard,

plus 100 GPM total combined hose flow as indicated on the plans.

3. Sprinkler heads and piping are required at all areas shown on Architectural

and/or Structural Drawings.

4. Furnish and install alarm bell flow switch riser. See Drawing for location of

riser. Alarm bell shall be located a minimum of 7’-0” above the ground.

5. Prime and finish painting of portions of the fire protection system as required

by the DSA, Architect or Rating Agency. See also Division 09, Painting.

6. Coordination of installation of electrical conduit for supervisory systems.

Provide all contacts required.

1.4 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following work is not in the work under this Section, but is covered in other

Sections.

1. Installation and connection of the electrical conduit for supervisory systems as

shown on the Electrical drawings.

2. Installation of the fire alarm systems as shown on the Electrical drawings.

3. Installation of the underground fire service.

1.5 CODE REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall conform to the requirements of the applicable Federal, State and

local building and safety codes, ordinances and regulations.



B. Special attention shall be given to local fire regulations and the regulations of the

local fire department and building department.

C. Special attention shall be given to local rulings of the Rating Agency.

D. Nothing in this Specification or on the Drawings shall be construed as permitting a

departure from any applicable Federal, State or local building and safety code,

ordinance or regulation, or from any requirements of the local fire department,

building department and/or Rating Agency.

1.6 RATING AGENCY

A. Whenever the words "Rating Agency" are used in this Specification, they shall

mean the insurance underwriters.

1.7 SUB-CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. This Contractor must be a C-16 Contractor, licensed by the State of California

Contractor's Licensing Board. No portion of the fire protection system (performed

on the job site) shall be subcontracted.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for review, within fifteen (15) days after signing contract, the required

number of copies of a complete list of materials proposed for use, including sizes,

capacities, etc. See Division 1 for requirements. This list includes:.

1. Sprinklers.

2. Piping.

3. Fittings.

4. Hangers and Bracing.

5. Pressure Guages.

6. Sprinkler Head Cabinet.

7. Valves.

8. Check Valves.

9. Alarm Bell.

B. Shop Coordination Drawings shall show all details and information required by

NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and/or NFPA 24. In addition, all earthquake bracing

(longitudinal and lateral) shall be shown. If unnecessary deviation from Drawings

are made by Contractor which cause additional cost to the Owner, Contractor shall

submit the changes to the Architect for compliance verification and the additional

cost shall be borne by the Contractor

C. Final Record Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Paragraph A above

and paragraph Record Drawings of this Section, showing exact dimensional

locations of all underground piping and of all risers, mains and cross-mains

D. On completion of the job, furnish the Architect with a copy of the "Contractor's

Material and Test Certificate" (Part A and/or B), signed by the local Fire Marshal,



and a copy of the Transmittal Letter sending the certificate to the Rating Agency

and DSA.

1.9 DESIGN OF SYSTEM

A. The riser locations are shown on the Drawings. Any request for changes must be

submitted to the Architect 48 hours prior to bid times for consideration.

B. All work shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of DSA, the Rating

Agency, the latest editions of NFPA 13, 14, and 24 and the appropriate edition of

the California Building Code and the Californina Fire Code (as modified by local

ordinance or ruling).

C. Each building’s sprinkler system shall be hydraulically calculated for the hazards

or commodity indicated in Section 1.4.

D. Calculations shall be based upon the water supply available at the connection with

the City water main.

E. The Sprinkler Contractor shall refer to the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical,

and Electrical Drawings and coordinate the system layout to not interfere with the

arrangement of lighting fixtures, grilles, diffusers, ductwork, equipment and piping

in the Building.

F. All piping shall be installed for routing as shown on Drawings, including cross-

mains, if shown. Also, piping shall be installed as close as practical to the roof

structure so as to provide the maximum possible clear height. Cross-mains shall

follow the roof line (tight to the bottom of the beams, purlins or joints) so as to

remain at an approximately constant distance from the roof throughout.

G. Fire protection system lines shall be designed so as to avoid all other utility lines,

conduit and structural components shown on the Drawings. Fire protection system

lines must give way to all gravity lines. Notify Architect if conflicts cannot be

coordinated in the field.

H. Cutting structural members shall not be allowed, unless otherwise approved by the

Structural Engineer or the Architect.

PRODUCTS PART 2 -

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new and currently listed in the Underwriters' Laboratories,

Inc. Fire Protection Equipment List and shall be acceptable to DSA. Material that is

pending approval shall not be acceptable.

B. Underground piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

installation guide.

C. Cast or ductile iron shall be installed to within 5'-0" of building and under all

footings and slabs.



D. Above ground piping to be ANSI/ASTM A795 hot-dipped galvanized electric

resistance welded and seamless carbon steel pipe. 1 1/2” and smaller use Schedule

40 with threaded fittings, 2” and greater shall be welded or roll grooved, minimum

wall thickness for 300 psi in accordance with Schedule 10 up to 5”, 0.134 in. wall

for 6” pipe, and 0.188 in. wall for 8” and 10” pipe.

E. Backfill shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

installation guide and the "Backfill" Section of these Specifications.

F. Overhead piping, fittings and hanger material shall conform to the requirements

outlined in NFPA 13.

G. Chrome plated escutcheon plates shall be provided where sprinkler piping passes

through walls, floors or ceilings.

H. The escutcheons shall be the same size throughout the building and shall match

ceiling decor.

I. A metal box containing replacement sprinkler heads shall be mounted near the riser

inside the building and shall contain at least 6 heads and at least 2 of each type of

head installed in the building. Also included shall be one wrench for each type of

head used in the building.

J. Bushings shall not be used unless specifically approved by the Architect.

K. Provide and install head guards on sprinkler heads in areas where they could be

damaged (stairwells, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, emergency generator

rooms, etc.).

L. Water flow switches shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the

Drawings. Flow switch shall be UL rated by Notifier or approved equal. Flow

switches shall be CSFM approved. Each switch shall have minimum of two poles

for 120 V operation.

M. Tamper-proof switches shall be 120 V tamper switches for each isolation and

control valve in each area. Electrical wiring and annunciating. Tamper switches

shall be CSFM approved.

N. Remote inspector’s Test station to be per NFPA 13, at location shown on

Drawings. Test station to be provided with isolation valve and orifice equal to one

sprinkler head flow, with drain to sanitary sewer.

2.2 HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORT

A. General: Provide hangers, brackets, supports, anchors and related appurtenances as

required to support all piping and equipment provided under this Section. Piping

and equipment supports shall conform to DSA approved drawings.

B. Piping supports shall conform to hanger details on DSA approved drawings and

NFPA 13.

C. Manufacturers: Superstrut, Elden, Fee and Mason, Grinnell or approved equal.



D. Floor Supports: Provide, where required, necessary floor supports for piping and

equipment. Supports shall be fabricated from structural members or shall be

masonry piers.

E. Sway Bracing: Per NFPA 13, DSA approved drawings and details.

2.3 SPRINKLER VALVES

A. Manufacturer: Selection based on Stockham. Stockham, Kennedy, Walworth or

Lunkenheimer, only, unless otherwise noted. All valves must be submitted and

meet rating as scheduled below. No foreign manufactured valves shall be used.

B. Valve pressure not less than 175 PSIG, except drain valves.

C. Main Drain Valves: 2” Nibco T-301-W, bronze body and trip, UL

D. Riser Check Valve: Tyco CV-1 riser swing check valve.

E. Riser Control Valve: Tyco BFV-N indicating butterfly valve with two sets of

factory spot (single pole double throw) switches.

F. Inspectors Test Valve: Tyco 1 1/4” model F350 test and drain valve with 5.6K test

orifice, shut-off valve and visual flow indicator.

G. Gauges: 3 1/2”, 0-300psi, Ashcroft type 1005P, XUL fire protection sprinkler

service -gauge fitted with gauge valve shut-off, UL, FM approved.

2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Exposed Ceiling Construction: Exposed upright automatic glass bulb type, plain

brass finish, equal to Tyco, TY-FRB.

B. Finished Ceiling: Contractor to check with Architect on color to have manufacturer

paint cover plates.

1. Concealed: Concealed pendent automatic glass bulb type, equal to Tyco,

“Royal Flush II”.

2. Recessed: Recessed pendent automatic glass bulb type, equal to Tyco, TY-

FRB.

3. Hard Ceiling: Pendent automatic glass bulb type equal to Tyco, TY-FRB with

Tyco 401 style escutcheon.

4. Cooler/Freezer: Dry pendent, quick response, standard coverage, equal to

Tyco, DS-1 with a temperature rating of 200 ºF.

C. Sidewall Heads: Contractor to check with Architect on color to have manufacturer

paint cover plates.

1. Recessed horizontal sidewall automatic glass bulb type equal to Tyco, TY-

FRB.



D. All heads, except as noted, to have temperature rating at 155ºF. Set head at and

around heating devices suitable under normal operation to eliminate false alarm by

generated heat.

E. Submittal: Submit 2 of each type of sprinkler head, complete with canopy, for

Architect’s review prior to ordering heads.

2.5 ALARM RELATED COMPONETS

A. Electric Bell: Potter 10” PBA1210, UL, FM approved CSFM listed.

B. Flow Switch: Potter VSR vane type waterflow alarm switch with retard, UL, FM

approved, CSFM listed, with (2) single pole adjustable switches.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Sprinkler Cabinet: Tyco 6 head cabinet P/N 1119 for systems under 300

sprinklers, Tyco 12 head cabinet P/N 1124, Tyco 24 head cabinet for systems over

1000 sprinklers.

B. Acess Panel: 24” x 24” Croker FRPWB1865 fire rated access panel with 16 gauge

steel door, continuous hinge and dry wall bead frame.

2.7 PRESSURE GAUGE

A. 3 1/2” 0-300psi Ashcroft type 1005P, XUL fire protection sprinkler service gauge

fitted with gauge valve shut-off, UL, FM approved.

2.8 SEISMIC JOINT

A. Seismic Joint: Metraflex fireloop seismic loop joint MLUG80XX series sized as

shown on the plans. Seismic joint shall allow for a minimum of +/- 4” of seismic

movement.

2.9 EXPANSION PLATE

A. Viking 12620 expansion plate or approved equal to conceal 1” annular clearance

around pendent head recessed escutcheons in suspended lay in ceilings.

2.10 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE

A. Flexible Sprinkler Hose: Flexible sprinkler hose for suspended lay in ceilings in

accordance with UL2443/ FM1637. Flexible sprinkler hoses shall be FlexHead

20XXF or approved equal. Flexible sprinkler hoses shall have a minimum 1 1/4”

internal diameter and a maximum length of 6 feet with a maximum friction loss

equivalent to 7.7 feet of 1” schedule 40 pipe.

2.11 HOSE VALVE AND HOSE RACK ASSEMBLY

A. Hose Valve: 1 1/2” UL listed cast brass angle valve for use with Croker 3000

Series hose rack assembly or approved equal, for use in Croker 1010 recessed hose

cabinet or approved equal.



B. Hose Rack Assembly: Complete UL listed hose rack assembly complete with 75

feet of poly lined hose, 1 1/2” cast brass coupling, 1 1/2” UL listed industrial fog

nozzle, 1 1/2” cadnium plated escutcheon, red enamel UL listed pin rack, and 1

1/2” cast brass nipple, Croker series 3000 hose rack assembly or approved equal.

EXECUTION PART 3 -

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Prior to bid, visit the job site and familiarize with local conditions, including

verification of the location of the existing utilities.

B. The contractor shall field verify existing conditions and provide accurate shop

coordination drawings for coordination with other trades in accordance with

Division 1.

C. All piping shall be installed in a manner acceptable to DSA.

D. All piping shall be pressure tested and flushed according to the procedures set forth

in NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 24, and witnessed by the General Contractor,

and the DSA Inspector of Record.

E. All equipment installed under this Contract shall be properly thrust blocked and

earthquake braced. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design and

installation of the equipment and for satisfying DSA, CSFM and the Architect that

these requirements have been met. Drawings shall show locations of earthquake

bracing, both lateral and longitudinal.

F. All equipment installed under this Contract shall be protected from external

damage. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design and installation

of the equipment, and for satisfying DSA, CFSM and the Architect that these

requirements have been met. Shop Drawings shall show details of protective

equipment.

G. The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves required for his/her work where

it passes through concrete. If sleeves are not installed, all penetrations shall be core

drilled. All penetrations shall be approved by the Architect before drilling.

H. This Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to other work caused by this

installation or by leaks in the fire protection lines.

I. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his/her work with the

General, Electrical, Mechanical, and Plumbing Contractors, and with other trades.

J. All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All heads to be located

as shown in the fire protection ceiling plans, on center or quarter points of ceiling

tiles unless otherwise noted. Location of sprinkler heads shall take note of

obstructions.

K. Escutcheons shall not be permitted closer than 6" to T-bar ceiling members if

conflicts with lights or grilles do not permit the centering of the heads in the tiles.

Architect shall have final approval on exact location of sprinkler heads.



Escutcheons shall not be mounted closer than 6" to any other ceiling mounted

device.

3.2 TOOLS

A. All special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided

under this Section shall be delivered to the Owner's representative and a receipt

requested for same.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Valves:

1. Standpipe control valve and floor control valves shall be clearly identified in

the Mechanical Room.

B. Piping Identification:

1. Apply color coded polyvinyl chloride pipe bands identifying service per

Section 21 00 00.

2. On exposed piping, apply bands at 20'-0" on centers at straight runs, at valve

locations, and at points where piping enters and leaves a partition, wall, floor,

or ceiling.

3. On concealed piping installed above removable ceiling construction, apply

bands in manner described for exposed piping.

4. On concealed piping installed above non-removable ceiling construction, or in

pipe shafts, apply bands at valves or other devices that are made accessible by

means of access doors or panels.

5. Apply bands at exit and entrance points at each piece of equipment.

6. Band widths shall be 8" for pipes up to 10" diameter, and 16" for larger

diameter piping. Letter heights stating service shall be pre-printed on band,

3/4" high for 8" bands and 1 1/4" high for 16" bands.

7. Colors shall conform to ANSI Standard A13.1.

8. Tags and bands shall be approved for this service

9. Where flexible sprinkler hose fittings are installed and supported by suspended

ceilings, the ceiling shall meet ASTM C 635 and ASTM C 636. Additionally, a

label limiting relocation of the sprinkler shall be provided on the anchoring

component. (NFPA 13-10, 9.2.1.3.3.2 & 9.2.1.3.3.4).

3.4 SPRINKLER DRAINS AND TEST CONNECTION

A. Provide all necessary drain valves, drain risers, capped nipples, auxiliary piping,

etc. as required to drain the system risers and mains, and all trapped portions of the

system. Drain valves which are not connected to drain pipes leading to floor drains

shall be hose end type.

B. Main drains and test connections shall be piped to sanitary sewer. Provide air gap

at discharge location shown on the plans.

C. Provide all piping required to spill the drains and test connections to the floor,

funnel or other drainage connections provided under the plumbing contract, or



arrange with the plumbing trade to provide additional drainage facilities, in which

case pay all charges related to the additional plumbing construction work.

3.5 TAGS

A. Provide all designated signs on shut-off valves, control valves, alarms, etc. as

required by the agencies having jurisdiction.

3.6 TESTING

A. All sprinkler system piping must be hydrostatically tested for a period of two (2)

hours in the presence of the Owner or his/her designee, and the DSA Inspector of

Record.

B. Hydrostatic tests shall be made not less than 200psi for 2 hours or 50psi above

static pressure in excess of 150psi.

C. Leakage from any fittings may be corrected by tightening or replacement of

defective materials only. Use of sealant materials is expressly prohibited and

unacceptable to the Owner as a corrective measure.

D. Gauges used in testing shall be identified as to accuracy, or provided by Owner, at

his/her option.

E. Blind flanges or inserts used for testing shall be placed in the system and removed

from the system in the presence of the Owner or his/her designee. These devices

shall be clearly marked and vividly painted to permit casual observance of their

addition to the system.

3.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Keep a current set of Record Drawings on the job at all times. These Drawings

shall be updated as changes are made and shall be kept in the Construction Office.

Also, see Special Conditions and Fire Protection General, Section 21 00 00.

B. Keep a current set of Specifications and material lists, with catalog cuts, in the

Construction Office at all times.

3.8 CLEAN-UP

A. Perform the work under this Section so as to keep affected portions of the site neat,

clean and orderly at all times. Upon completion of the work under this Section,

immediately remove all surplus materials, rubbish and equipment associated with

or used in the performance of this work. Failure to perform such clean-up

operations within 24 hours of notice by the Architect or General Contractor shall be

considered adequate grounds for the work to be done by others at this Sub-

Contractor's expense.

3.9 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Four (4) complete sets of operational and maintenance (O&M) booklets shall be

supplied to the Architect with Record Drawings. One (1) set shall be retained by

the engineer of record.



B. O&M booklets shall be complete and include:

1. NFPA25 California Edition.

2. System operation and maintenance instruction.

3. Inspection and Testing Log.



UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE 21 10 00 - 1

SECTION 211000 - UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, Section 21 00 00, Fire Protection

General, and Division 1 are hereby a part of this Section as fully as if repeated herein.

B. Section Includes: Description of requirements for materials and installation of site utilities

and related work as shown on Drawings and necessary to provide a complete and proper

installation.

C. The work includes under this section consists essentially of, but not necessarily limited to

installing new site utilities in areas indicated on Drawings.

D. Related work:

Section 21 00 00 Fire Protection General

Section 21 05 00 Overhead Fire Protection System

1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required for and/or reasonably incidental

to the completion of the following work:

1. Connection to existing private fire main shown on the civil drawings with minimum 4”

diameter sprinkler main.

2. Check, Post Indicator Valve and Fire Department Connection Assembly as shown on

the contract drawings.

3. In-Building Riser ending at a flange 12” above finish grade, with a blank flange bolted

on top. Riser shall be located as shown on the drawings.

4. Trenching and backfill for underground piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for review, within fifteen (15) days after signing Contract, the required number of

copies of a complete list of materials proposed for use, including sizes, capacities, etc. See

Division 1 for requirements. This list includes:

1. Piping.

2. Fittings.

3. Valves.

4. Tracer wire.

5. Warning tape.

6. Check Valves.

7. Post Indicator.

8. Fire Department Connection.

9. In-Building Riser.



10. Polyethylene Wrap.

11. Mechanical Joint Restraint.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Before submitting a bid for the mechanical work the Contractor shall visit the site and

become familiar with all the work on other related Drawings and Specifications, and plan

his/her work to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of all trades. No

additional costs will be considered for work which has to be relocated due to conflicts with

other trades.

1.5 BUILDING LAWS

A. Mechanical work shall conform to all requirements prescribed by governmental bodies

having jurisdiction and is to be in accordance with the California Plumbing Code, California

Mechanical Code, California Fire Code, National Fire Protection Association; California

State Code Title 8, Title 21, and Title 24; and the Energy Conservation Standards.

B. Should any part of the design fail to comply with such requirements, the discrepancy shall be

called to the attention of the Architect prior to submitting a bid.

C. Should there be any direct conflict between the Drawings and/or Specifications and the above

rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence. However, when the

indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of a superior quality or

capacity to that required by above rules and regulations, the Drawings and/or Specifications

shall take precedence. Rulings and interpretations of enforcing agencies shall be considered a

part of the regulations.

D. After a Contract is awarded, if minor changes or additions are required by the aforementioned

authorities, even though such work is not shown on Drawings or overtly covered in the

Specifications, they must be included at the Contractor's expense.

E. The Contractor is responsible to coordinate and make adjustments in his/her work with the

full set of Contract Drawings and Specifications.

1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees. The Contractor shall arrange for

all required inspections.

1.7 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall route site utilities to approximately 5'-0" outside of building, or as

shown on Drawings.

1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All equipment provided shall deliver full rated capacity at efficiency for which designed. All

equipment shall meet requirements indicated and be suitable for installation shown. Notify

Architect of any shortcomings found at least ten (10) days prior to bid date. Equipment not

meeting all specified requirements will not be accepted even though specified by name along

with other manufacturers.



B. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished in the same Section of

the Specification, provide each from the same manufacturer. Furnish all equipment and

materials new and free from defects.

C. Capacities, dimensions or sizes specified or indicated are minimum. Tolerances used in rating

or testing standards specified not allowed in determining capacities of equipment.

D. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's application

recommendations, requirements, and instructions, and in accordance with Contract

Documents. Where manufacturer's instructions differ from those indicated or specified, they

shall be brought to Architect’s attention for resolution prior to equipment ordering and

installation. Where requirements indicated in Contract Documents exceed manufacturer's

requirements, Contract Documents shall govern.

E. All non-metallic piping below grade shall have tracer wire and warning tape installed as part

of this scope of work.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Information on Drawings relative to existing conditions is approximate. During progress of

construction, deviations found necessary to conform to actual conditions shall be reported to

Architect for determination of procedure to be followed. Contractor is responsible for any

damage caused to existing systems. Promptly notify Architect if utilities are found which are

not indicated.

B. Existing equipment, piping, wiring, construction of City sidewalk, street, etc. which interferes

with work of this Section shall be removed and promptly returned to service. Replace

damaged items with new material to match existing. The City of Santa Clara and private

utilities must be informed of property owned by them that has been damaged and replaced.

C. Remove materials not required for present or future use of facility and not claimed by Owner

shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises. Consult

Owner before removing any material from the premises. Materials claimed by the Owner

shall be removed carefully to prevent damage and delivered on-site where directed.

D. Existing piping and wiring not reused and concealed in building construction may be

abandoned in place, but all such piping and wiring which is exposed or indicated to be

removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the

premises.

E. Verify all dimensions, lines, and levels at the site for all work specified herein. All inverts,

slopes, and elevations shall be established by instrument working from established datum.

Provide elevation markers and lines for Owner's use in determining that slopes and elevations

are in accordance with contract requirements. Accurately locate trenches in relation to

building and boundary lines as indicated.



1.10 PART II - PRODUCTS

PART 2 - PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING AND MATERIALS

A. Fire and sprinkler mains to 5’-0” from the building shall be Manville “Blue Brute” PVC, FM

Class 200, DR14, “Certainteed” C900, or approved equal, with ringtite joint for 4” or larger.

Lubricate per manufacturer’s recommendations (see Thrust Block detail). For 3” and

smaller, Schedule 40 PVC pipe with solvent joints (rated at 200 PSI fittings).

B. Tracer wire for all non-metallic piping shall be minimum size #10 AWG copper wire with

U.L. approval for direct-burial with an insulating jacket of Yellow Color. Piping shall have a

contiguous trace wire strapped to the pipe every 5 lineal feet and shall be accessible at every

riser and in-grade valve box. Contractor shall provide both warning tape and trace wire for

all underground piping.

C. All fire and sprinkler service materials shall be new and currently listed in the Underwriters’

laboratories, Inc. Fire Protection Equipment List and shall be acceptable to DSA. Material

that is pending approval shall not be acceptable.

D. All underground piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

installation guide.

E. Sprinkler mains shall be cast or ductile iron when installed to within 5’-0” of building and

under all footings and slabs.

F. All metallic piping fittings shall be coated and wrapped. Metallic piping and fittings shall be

polyethylene encased for corrosive soil conditions.

G. All bolt-up sets (nuts, bolts, and washers) and tie rods for valves, fittings and buries shall be

stainless steel, ASTM A-276 Type 316.

H. Backfill shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation guide

and the “Backfill” Section of these Specifications.

I. Fire department connection shall be as follows:

1. Body: 2 way Croker 6407.

2. Inlet: 2-way – (2) 2 1/2”.

3. Bottom Outlet: (1) 4”.

4. Finish: Rough Brass.

5. Identification: Branded, “AUTO-SPKR-STAND-PIPE”, or as required by fire

department.

6. Provide check valve between fire main and fire department connection.

J. Wafer Check Valve: Nibco KW-900-W, UL/FM approved.

K. Double Check Detector Assembly: Ames 3000 SS standard orientation in accordance with

local water purveyor standards, complete with 5/8” x 3/4” bypass meter and trim. Size as

indicated on the Drawings. The double check detector assembly shall have a maximum

pressure drop of 7 psi at a 2000 gpm flow rate.



L. Indicator Post: Kennedy style 2945A UL/ FM approved.

M. Tamper-proof witches shall be 120 V tamper switches for each isolation and control valve in

each area. Electrical wiring and annunciating. Tamper switches shall be CSFM approved.

N. In-Building Riser: Ames series IBR, 304 stainless steel, UL/FM approved.

O. Polyethylene Wrap: Minimum 8 mil polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA

C105/A21.5-10. Christy’s Polyethylene Fitting Wrap 26 or approved equal.

2.2 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron, screw adjustable type with loose cast iron cover as

manufactured by M&H, Mueller, Iowa or Pacific States Cast Iron. Covers shall be lettered

"Water" or as detailed and specified on Drawings.

2.3 THRUST BLOCKS

A. Provide concrete thrust blocks at all changes in direction of fire and fire sprinkler main.

Minimum face area against undisturbed soil shall be 6 ft2 on water mains, or as indicated;

1/2" diameter rods shall be bent around pipe and anchored into 2000 lb strength concrete.

Thrust blocks shall be provided in addition to mechanical joint restraint per local fire marshal.

2.4 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINT

A. Provide mechanical joint restraint at all changes in direction of the fire and fire sprinkler

mains. Mechanical joint restraint for C900 PVC pipe shall be EBAA Iron Megalug series

2000PV or approved equal. Mechanical joint restraint for ductile iron pipe shall be EBAA

Iron Meglug series 1100 or approved equal.

2.5 VALVES

A. All valves shall be the product of a single manufacturer, Mueller, Stockham, Kennedy or

Clow. Valves shall be mechanical joint and be AWWA approved.

2.6 CHECK VALVES

A. Check valves shall be used when installing a fire department connection on the main.

2.7 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. The fire hydrants shall be Clow 960 wet barrel type with one 4 ½” pumper and two 2 ½”

outlets in accordance with local standards.

2.8 PART III - EXECUTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Prior to bid, visit the job site and familiarize with local conditions, including verification of

the location of the existing utilities.



B. All fire and sprinkler piping shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the local CFSM and

DSA and the Rating Agency.

C. All fire and sprinkler piping shall be pressure tested and flushed according to the procedures

set forth in NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 24, and witnessed by the General Contractor and

the DSA Inspector of Record.

D. This Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to other work caused by this installation

or by leaks in the fire protection lines.

E. This contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his/her work with the General,

Electrical, Mechanical, and Plumbing Contractors, and with other trades.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for installation of mechanical work.

Any work damaged during excavation and backfilling shall be repaired at Contractor's

expense.

B. Trenches are to be excavated to necessary depth and width. Provide additional excavation to

facilitate crossovers, additional offsets, etc. as required. Excavation material is unclassified.

Width of trench adequate for proper installation of piping.

C. Bedding shall be on minimum 6" deep layer of sand placed on leveled trench bottom. Sand

removed to necessary depth for piping bells and couplings to maintain contact of pipe on sand

for entire length. All other piping laid on smooth level trench bottom to maintain contact for

entire length.

D. All backfill shall be bank run sand and/or gravel to 6" above piping up to slab on interior

piping below slabs. All backfill placed in layers not exceeding 8" deep and compacted to 95%

of maximum density at optimum moisture content per AASHO Standard T-99.

E. During progress of work, Owner may have compaction tests made under direction of testing

laboratory for all compacted fill. If found not to meet Specification, Contractor shall excavate

and recompact fill at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Following backfilling, grade all trenches to level of surrounding subgrade. All excess soil

shall be located per Owner's instructions.

3.3 SETTING OF FIRE HYDRANTS, VALVES AND VALVE BOXES

A. Fire hydrants shall be located where indicated and installed as shown. Each hydrant shall be

connected to the main with a 6” branch line with at least much cover as the distribution main.

Hydrants shall be set plumb with the pumper nozzle facing the roadway or fire departments

access route. The center of the lowest outlet shall be not less than 18” above the finished

surrounding grade, and the operating nut not more than 48” above the finished surrounding

grade. Except where otherwise approved, the backfill around hydrants shall be thoroughly

compacted to the finished grade line immediately after installation to obtain beneficial use of

hydrant as soon as practicable. Provide thrust blocks in direction of flow. The hydrant shall

be set upon a slab of concrete not less than 4” thick and 15 square inches (see thrust block

detail).



B. Valves, after delivery, shall be drained to prevent freezing and shall have the interiors cleaned

of all foreign matter before installation. Stuffing boxes shall be tightened and the hydrant or

valve shall be fully opened and carefully closed to insure that all parts are in working

conditions.

C. Thrust Blocks: Plugs, caps, tees, and bends deflecting 22 1/2° or more, either vertically or

horizontally, on water lines 4" in diameter or larger and fire hydrants shall be provided with

thrust blocking. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than 2 parts cement;

2 1/2 parts sand; 5 parts gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2,000 PSI

at 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the hydrant or fitting to be

anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of thrust

blocks shall be poured directly against undisturbed earth. The sides of thrust blocks not

subject to thrust may be poured against forms. The area of bearing shall be as shown or as

directed. Blocking shall be placed so that the fitting joints will be accessible for repair.

3.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply in general with applicable portions of

latest current local and/or State ordinances and codes.

B. Include all items of labor and material required to comply with such standards and codes.

Where quantities, sizes or other requirements indicated are in excess of standard or code

requirements, specified requirements shall govern.

3.5 COORDINATION

A. Do all work to receive or joint with work of all trades; cut new service into existing mains;

extend piping; and make necessary connections as required to prevent interruption of service.

All work shall be coordinated with work of other trades to provide clearances for installation

and maintenance of all mechanical equipment. Drawings and Specifications are arranged for

convenience only and do not necessarily determine which trades perform various portions of

the work.

B. Before shutdown of any utility service for new connections, coordinate with and notify

Owner, County, and utility company(s). Contractor to verify with Architect for approval for

areas of interference with existing facilities and operation of departments before doing any

work. Contractor to work out schedule of construction and get approval by Architect before

starting any work.

3.6 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all offsets, bends, elbows, etc. which may be

required for proper installation of work. Such work shall be verified by Contractor at building

site. Provide additional bends and offsets as required by riser and main locations, or other

conditions, to complete work at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as

binding as if called for by both. Items indicated are not necessarily included in Specifications.

Specifications shall supersede Drawings in case of conflict.



3.7 TESTING

A. Test all piping, valves, clean-outs, etc. as listed below and provide the Architect with certified

copies of test results. The inspection authority having jurisdiction and the supervising

Architect shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to performance of all tests so that they may

be witnessed.

1. All new fire main piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 225 PSI for 2 hours in

the presence of the Local Fire Marshall and DSA Inspector of Record.




UTILITY PLUMBING 22 00 00

SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Includes:

1. New pressure reducing valves with bypass and strainers.

B. Section Includes:

1. Pipe and fittings for site water lines.

2. Valves, unions, and hose bibs.

3. Bedding and cover materials.


1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for equipment pads.

2. Section 31 05 13 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils and slurry for backfill in trenches.

3. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Product and execution requirements for trenching and

backfill required by this section.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

2. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

3. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)

Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.

4. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 40.

5. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

6. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by


7. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using

Flexible Elastomeric Seals.

8. ASTM B88 – Wrought copper tube, Type L

B. American Water Works Association:

1. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.

2. AWWA C504 - Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves.

3. AWWA C508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. (50 mm) Through 24

in. (600 mm) NPS.

4. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service.

5. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in., for Water

Distribution.

6. AWWA C110 – Ductile Iron Pipe fittings




1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust

restraints, and invert elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Perform Work in accordance with Caltrans Standards.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and

protecting products.

B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Metals – 3” or smaller water piping

1. Above ground : Copper pipe per ASTM B88 Type L, annealed

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper. b. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. c. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.

2. Below ground : Ductile Iron per AWWA C151 and C104

a. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.

b. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods.

c. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, Double layer, half lapped, 10 mil

polyethylene tape.

3. PVC – 3” or smaller water piping ASTM d1785 schedule 80

a. Fittings: ASTM D2466 PVS

b. Joints: ASTM D2855 solvent weld




2.2 GATE VALVES

A. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc,

IPS ends, with control rod, extension box and valve key.

B. 3 inches and Larger: AWWA C509 or C515, Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut,

single wedge, resilient seat, flanged or mechanical joint ends, control rod, extension box and valve

key.

C. All valve hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel.

D. All valves shall be the product of a single manufacturer- Homestead, NIBCO, Stockham, or

Crane, 125 PSIG steam service rated and 200 PSI air and water rated.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Ductile Iron pipe fittings shall be of identical material to iron pipe, flanged and mechanical joint,

conforming to ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110 for center to end dimensions & wall thickness. Fittings

shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Grooved ends shall conform to

AWWA C606. Grooved products may be used in lieu of flanged couplings & fittings in applicable

piping systems.

B. Victaulic Couplings: Victualic Style 31. Manufactured in two or more segments of cast ductile iron

conforming to A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber,

FlushSeal type. Mechanical coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon

steel track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-183, minimum tensile

strength 110,000 psi as provided standard Victaulic.

C. Transition Couplings: Victualic Style 307. For Transition between IPS steel & AWWA ductile iron

sized pipe. Housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern, bolt pads.

D. Coupling Gaskets: Synthetic rubber, FlushSeal configuration, conforming to AWWA pipe outside

diameter & coupling housing, manufactured of elastomers as designated in ASTM D-2000. Gaskets

used on potable water systems shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61.

E. Flange Adapters: Victualic Style 341. For use with AWWA grooved end pipe & fittings, for

mating to ANSI Class 125 flanged components.

2.4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES & PARTS

A. PRV shall be Watts LF223S; size per plans.

B. All pressure reducing parts shall be graded for the psi of the surrounding water system, rated for

potable water use. Part material can be bronze, cast iron, stainless steel, or an alloy but must be the

product of a single manufacturer- Watts, Cla-Val, or approved equal.

C. Strainers shall be flanged, lead-free, wye-pattern strainers, and shall match the surrounding part

material where possible. Strainers shall have a bolted screen retainer cover and PTFE gasket with a

blowdown plug for ease of maintenance. Strainers shall be the product of a single manufacturer-

Watts, Cla-Val, or approved equal- and may be integral with the pressure reducing valve.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.

B. Verify building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as

indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.

B. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.

C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

D. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for installation of mechanical work. Any work

damaged during excavation and backfilling shall be repaired at Contractor's expense.

B. Verification of Existing Conditions:

1. It shall be one of the responsibilities under this Section to examine the site of work and,

after investigation, to determine the character of the materials to be encountered and the

existing conditions affecting the work.

2. Excavation shall be unclassified and shall include the removal of all buried obstructions

within the area to be excavated.

C. Trench for underground pipelines shall be to the required depths. Maintain excavations free of water

while installing pipe and until backfilling.

D. After backfilling, remove from the premises all surplus earth resulting from this work and dispose of

same off the site.

3.4 GENERAL PIPING

A. Thoroughly clean all pipe and maintain in clean condition during construction temporarily capping

or plugging ends of pipe when not being worked on. B. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the site and work into place without springing or

undue forcing and out of the way of openings, ductwork, and equipment; ream ends of screwed pipes

and tubing to original bore before connecting together. C. Protect all piping located over switchboards, electrical machinery, or equipment against condensation. D. Arrange water piping for drainage at low points; place drain valves to be accessible.

E. Make up screw joints with approved pipe joint compound applied to male threads only.




F. Solder joints in copper tubing with lead free soft solder and flux. All joints to be cleaned bright

before soldering. G. Where changes in pipe size occur, use only reducing fittings. For drainage pipe changes in direction,

use long sweep bends where possible; otherwise, use short sweep 1/4 bends or combination Wye and

1/8 bends. Use sanitary Tee branches only for horizontal branches discharging to stacks. H. Install all piping & equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s latest recommendations. Follow all

requirements listed in accompanying documentation & manufacturer’s latest applicable installation

manuals. All field personnel performing installation of specialized equipment & systems shall be

provided on-site training by factory trained representative prior to starting work. I. Pipe ends shall be clean & free from indentations & projections in the area from pipe end to

groove. Verify suitability of gasket style & elastomeric material grade prior to ordering/installation.

J. Unions: Provide screwed unions or flanges in locations required for disconnecting and connecting of

all equipment, traps, by- passes, and fixture traps.

K. Support piping where necessary at sufficiently close intervals (and 24" from each fitting and change

of direction) to keep it in alignment and to prevent sagging.

L. All exposed pipe and trim at fixtures shall be chrome-plated.

M. Anchor vertical risers with hooks, brackets, or clamps to make rigid.

N. All changes of direction of piping shall be made with fittings. Do not bend pipe or hard copper water

tubing.

3.5 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17 for Work of this Section.

B. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at change of pipe direction. Refer to City of Santa

Cruz Water Department Details for thrust block details.

C. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6

inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent relative compaction.

D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill to within 12” of ground surface, tamp in place

and compact to 95 percent relative compaction.

E. Place fill material in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

3.6 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Install grooved and shouldered pipe joints to AWWA C606.

B. Route pipe in straight line.

C. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.




D. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main.

E. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 feet of cover.

F. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe buried 12 inches below finish grade, above pipe

line.

G. Install tracer wire continuous taped to top of pipe at 3 foot intervals.

H. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17.

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Set valves on solid bearing compacted soil with thrust restraint or encase in slurry.

B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.

3.8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ASSEMBLIES

A. All new piping shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Owner.

B. All new piping shall be pressure tested and flushed according to the procedures set forth in NFPA 13

and NFPA 24, and witnessed by the Contractor and Owner. C. All equipment installed under this Contract shall be properly thrust blocked and earthquake

braced. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design and installation of the equipment and for

satisfying the Owner that these requirements have been met. Shop Drawings shall show locations of

earthquake bracing, both lateral and longitudinal.

D. All equipment installed under this Contract shall be protected from external damage. Contractor

shall be responsible for the proper design and installation of the equipment, and for satisfying the

Owner and/or the College’s Representative that these requirements have been met. Shop Drawings

shall show details of protective equipment.

E. All penetrations shall be core drilled. All penetrations shall be approved by the College’s

Representative before drilling. F. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to other work caused by installation or by

leaks in the domestic water protection lines.

G. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his/her work. All work shall be done in a neat and

workmanlike manner.

H. Test all piping, equipment, and systems as called for in the Specifications. Notify College’s

Representative and inspection authorities prior to testing so that they may be witnessed. Protect all

personnel and equipment during testing. Where Specifications do not cover specific points or

methods, conform to manufacturer's specifications. I. Test pressure shall be 50 PSI in excess of maximum water pressure or 200 PSI, whichever is greater.




J. Leakage from any fittings may be corrected by tightening or replacement of defective materials only.

Use of sealant materials is expressly prohibited and unacceptable to the College’s Representative as a

corrective measure.



GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Description of Work:

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and

equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations that are shown on the Drawings,

included in these specifications, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility.

B. Furnish and install all required in-place equipment, conduits, conductors, cables and any

miscellaneous materials for the satisfactory interconnection and operation of all associated

electrical systems.

1.02 Related Work:

A. This Section provides the basic Electrical Requirements which supplement the General

Requirements of Division 01 and apply to all Sections of Division 26.

1.03 Submittals:

A. As specified in Division 01. Submit to the Architect shop drawings, manufacturer's data and

certificates for equipment, materials and finish, and pertinent details for each system specified.

Information to be submitted includes manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged

products, equipment, drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves as applicable,

test data and catalog cuts. Obtain written approval before procurement, fabrication, or delivery

of the items to the job site. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without

review. Furnish manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data,

size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable

Federal, Industry and Technical Society Publication References, and years of satisfactory

service of each item required to establish contract compliance. Photographs of existing

installations and data submitted in lieu of catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned

without approval.

B. Organize submittals for equipment and items related to each specification section together as a

package.

C. Proposed substitutions of products will not be reviewed or approved prior to awarding of the

Contract.

D. Substitutions shall be proven to the Architect or Engineer to be equal or superior to the

specified product. Architect’s decision is final. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred by

the Architect and Engineer in reviewing and processing any proposed substitutions whether or

not a proposed substitution is accepted.

E. If a proposed substitution is rejected, the contractor shall furnish the specified product at no

increase in contract price.

F. If a proposed substitution is accepted, the contractor shall be completely responsible for all

dimensional changes, electrical changes, or changes to other work which are a result of the



substitution. The accepted substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the owner or

design consultants.

1.04 Quality Assurance:

A. Codes: All electrical equipment and materials, including installation and testing, shall conform

to the latest editions following applicable codes:

1. California Electrical Code (CEC).

2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards.

3. All applicable local codes, rules and regulations.

4. Electrical Contractor shall posses a C-10 license and all other licenses as may be required.

Licenses shall be in effect at start of this contract and be maintained throughout the

duration of this contract.

B. Variances: In instances where two or more codes are at variance, the most restrictive

requirement shall apply.

C. Standards: Equipment shall conform to applicable standards of American National Standards

Institute (ANSI), Electronics Industries Association (EIA), Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

D. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) listing is required for all equipment and materials where such

listing is offered by the Underwriters Laboratories. Provide service entrance labels for all

equipment required by the NEC to have such labels.

E. The electrical contractor shall guarantee all work and materials installed under this contract for

a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by owner.

F. All work and materials covered by this specification shall be subject to inspection at any and all

times by representatives of the owner. Work shall not be closed in or covered before inspection

and approval by the owner or his representative. Any material found not conforming with these

specifications shall, within 3 days after being notified by the owner, be removed from premises;

if said material has been installed, entire expense of removing and replacing same, including

any cutting and patching that may be necessary, shall be borne by the contractor.

1.05 Contract Documents:

A. Drawings and Specifications:

1. In the case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall take

precedence.

2. Drawings and specifications are intended to comply with all law, ordinances, rules and

regulations of constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and where referred to in the

Contract Documents, said laws, ordinance, rules and regulations shall be considered as a

part of said Contract Documents within the limits specified. The Contractor shall bear all

expenses of correcting work done contrary to said laws, ordinance, rules and regulations if



the Contractor knew or should have known that the work as performed is contrary to said

laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and if the Contractor performed same (1) without

first consulting the Architect for further instructions regarding said work and/or (2)

disregarded the Architect’s instructions regarding said work.

B. Drawings: The Electrical Drawings shall govern the general layout of the completed

construction.

1. Locations of equipment, panels, pullboxes, conduits, stub-ups, ground connections are

approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the Architect prior to installation.

2. Review the Drawings and Specification Divisions of other trades and perform the electrical

work that will be required for those installations.

3. Should there be a need to deviate from the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, submit

written details and reasons for all changes to the Architect for approval.

4. The general arrangement and location of existing conduits, piping, apparatus, etc., is

approximate. The drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the

contractor, exact locations, distances and elevations are governed by actual field conditions.

Accuracy of data given herein and on the drawings is not guaranteed. Minor changes may

be necessary to accommodate work. The contractor is responsible for verifying existing

conditions. Should it be necessary to deviate from the design due to interference with

existing conditions or work in progress, claims for additional compensation shall be limited

to those for work required by unforeseen conditions as determined by the Architect.

5. All drawings and divisions of these specifications shall be considered as whole. The

contractor shall report any apparent discrepancies to the Architect prior to submitting bids.

6. The contractor shall be held responsible to have examined the site and compared it with the

specifications and plans and to have satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the

work is to be performed. He shall be held responsible for knowledge of all existing

conditions whether or not accurately described. No subsequent allowance shall be made

for any extra expense due to failure to make such examination.

1.06 Closeout Submittals:

A. Manuals: Furnish manuals for equipment where manuals are specified in the equipment

specifications or are specified in Division 01.

1.07 Coordination:

A. Coordinate the electrical work with the other trades, code authorities, utilities and the Architect.

B. Contractor shall pay all inspection and other applicable fees and procure all permits necessary

for the completion of this work.

C. Where connections must be made to existing installations, properly schedule all the required

work, including the power shutdown periods.

D. When two trades join together in an area, make certain that no electrical work is omitted.



1.08 Job Conditions:

A. Operations: Perform all work in compliance with Division 01.

1. Keep the number and duration of power shutdown periods to a minimum.

2. Show all proposed shutdowns and their expected duration on the construction schedule.

Schedule and carry out shutdowns so as to cause the least disruption to operation of the

Owner's facilities.

3. Carry out shutdown only after the schedule has been approved, in writing, by the owner.

Submit power interruption schedule 15 days prior to date of interruption.

B. Construction Power: Unless otherwise noted in Division 01 of these specifications, contractor

shall make all arrangements and provide all necessary facilities for temporary construction

power [from the owner’s on site source. Energy costs shall be paid for by the Owner.] [to the

site. Energy costs shall be paid by the General Contractor.]

C. Storage: Provide adequate storage for all equipment and materials which will become part of

the completed facility so that it is protected from weather, dust, water, or construction

operations.

1.09 Damaged Products:

A. Notify the Architect in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged. Obtain

approval from the Architect before making repairs to damaged products.

1.10 Locations:

A. General: Use equipment, materials and wiring methods suitable for the types of locations in

which they are located.

B. Dry Locations: All those indoor areas which do not fall within the definition below for Wet

Locations and which are not otherwise designated on the Drawings.

C. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, unless

otherwise designated on the Drawings.

1.11 Safety and Indemnity:

A. The Contractor is solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including

safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply

continually and not be limited to normal working hours. The contractor shall provide and

maintain throughout the work site proper safeguards including, but not limited to, enclosures,

barriers, warning signs, lights, etc. to prevent accidental injury to people or damage to property.

B. No act, service, drawing review or construction review by the Owner, the Engineer or their

Consultants is intended to include reviews of the adequacy of the Contractors safety measures

in or near the construction site.



C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless,

indemnify, and defend the Owner, the Engineer, their consultants, and each of their officers,

agents and employees from any and all liability claims, losses, or damage arising out of or

alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons and for all

damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of or

in connection with the performance of the work under this Division of the Specifications, and

from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the construction

contract documents, but not including liability that may be due to the sole negligence of the

Owner, the Engineer, their Consultants or their officers, agents and employees.

D. If a work area is encountered that contains hazardous materials, the contractor is advised to

coordinate with the owner and it's abatement consultant for abatement of hazardous material by

the Owner’s Representative. “Hazardous materials” means any toxic substance regulated or

controlled by OSHA, EPA, State of California or local rules, regulations and laws. Nothing

herein shall be construed to create a liability for Aurum Consulting Engineers regarding

hazardous materials abatement measures, or discovery of hazardous materials.

1.12 Arc Flash:

A. The contractor shall install a clearly visible arc flash warning to the inside door of all

panelboards and industrial control panels, as well as to the front of all switchboards and motor

control centers that are a part of this project.

B. The warning shall have the following wording: line 1 “WARNING” (in large letters), line 2

“Potential Arc Flash Hazard” (in medium letters), line 3 & 4 “Appropriate Personal Protective

Equipment and Tools required when working on this equipment”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Standard of Quality:

A. Products that are specified by manufacturer, trade name or catalog number establish a standard

of quality and do not prohibit the use of equal products of other manufacturers provided they

are established to be equal to the specified product and approved by the Architect prior to

installation.

B. Material and Equipment: Provide materials and equipment that are new and are current

products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. The standard

products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid

opening. The two-year period includes use of equipment and materials of similar size under

similar circumstances. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of

product.

C. Service Support: Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations including

their addresses and qualification for support of the equipment. These service organizations

shall be convenient to the equipment installation and able to render service to the equipment on

a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures are required to be in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the

recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until



recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendation shall be cause for rejection

of the equipment or material.

2.02 Nameplates:

A. For each piece of electrical equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing his name,

location, the pertinent ratings, the model designation, and shop order number.

B. Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved plastic

nameplate. Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0.125 inch thick,

white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square.

Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 0.5

by 2.5 inches unless otherwise noted. Where not otherwise specified, lettering shall be a

minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. Engrave nameplates with the inscriptions

indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the equipment name. Securely fasten

nameplates in place using two stainless steel or brass screws.

2.03 Fasteners:

A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized

after fabrication or stainless steel.

2.04 Finish requirements:

A. Equipment: Refer to each electrical equipment section of these Specifications for painting

requirements of equipment enclosures. Repair any final paint finish which has been damaged

or is otherwise unsatisfactory, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Wiring System: In finished areas, paint all exposed conduits, boxes and fittings to match the

color of the surface to which they are affixed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Workmanship:

A. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installation.

B. Perform any required work to correct improperly fit installation at no additional expense to the

owner.

C. All electrical equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and workmanship manner in

accordance with the “NECA-1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical

Contracting”. Workmanship of the entire job shall be first class in every respect.

3.02 Equipment Installations:

A. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials

to their supports.

B. Do all the cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work and repair any

damage done.



C. Earthquake restraints: all electrical equipment, including conduits over 2 inches in diameter,

shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction as per CBC

Section 1616A Title 24, part 2 and ASCE7-10, Sections 13.3 and 13.6 and Table 13.6-1.

D. Structural work: All core drilling, bolt anchor insertion, or cutting of existing structural

concrete shall be approved by a California registered structural consulting engineer prior to the

execution of any construction. At all floor slabs and structural concrete walls to be drilled, cut

or bolt anchors inserted, the contractor shall find and mark all reinforcing in both faces located

by means of x-ray, pach-ometer, or prof-ometer. Submit sketch showing location of rebar and

proposed cuts, cores, or bolt anchor locations for approval.

3.03 Field Test:

A. Test shall be in accordance with Acceptance testing specifications issued by the National

Electrical Testing Association (NETA).

B. Perform equipment field tests and adjustments. Properly calibrate, adjust and operationally

check all circuits and components, and demonstrate as ready for service. Make additional

calibration and adjustments if it is determined later that the initial adjustments are not

satisfactory for proper performance. Perform equipment field test for equipment where

equipment field tests are specified in the equipment Specifications. Give sufficient notice to

the Architect prior to any test so that the tests may witnessed.

C. Provide instruments, other equipment and material required for the tests. These shall be of the

type designed for the type of tests to be performed. Test instrument shall be calibrated by a

recognized testing laboratory within three months prior to performing tests.

D. Operational Tests: Operationally test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment

have been properly installed and adjusted and are ready for full-time service. Demonstrate the

proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, including alarm conditions.

E. Re-testing will be required for all unsatisfactory tests after the equipment or system has been

repaired. Re-test all related equipment and systems if required by the Architect. Repair and re-

test equipment and systems which have been satisfactorily tested but later fail, until satisfactory

performance is obtained.

F. Maintain records of each test and submit five copies to the Architect when testing is complete.

All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect. These records shall include:

1. Name of equipment tested.

2. Date of report.

3. Date of test.

4. Description of test setup.

5. Identification and rating of test equipment.

6. Test results and data.



7. Name of person performing test.

8. Owner or Architect's initials.

G. Items requiring testing shall be as noted in the additional electrical sections of these

specifications.

3.04 Cleaning Equipment:

A. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials.

3.05 Painting of Equipment:

A. Factory Applied: Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting system which shall,

as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test and the

additional requirements specified in the technical section.

B. Field Applied: Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces.

3.06 Records:

A. Maintain one copy of the contract Drawing Sheets on the site of the work for recording the "as

built" condition. After completion of the work, the Contractor shall carefully mark the work as

actually constructed, revising, deleting and adding to the Drawing Sheets as required. The

following requirements shall be complied with:

1. Cable Size and Type: Provide the size and type of each cable installed on project.

2. Substructure: Where the location of all underground conduits, pull boxes, stub ups and etc.

where are found to different than shown, carefully mark the correct location on the

Drawings. Work shall be dimensioned from existing improvements.

3. Size of all conduit runs.

4. Routes of concealed conduit runs and conduit runs below grade.

5. Homerun points of all branch circuit.

6. Location of all switchgear, panels, MCC, lighting control panels, pullcans, etc.

7. Changes made as a result of all approved change orders, addendums, or field authorized

revisions.

8. As Builts: At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall review, certify, correct and

turn over the marked up Drawings to the Architect for his use in preparing "as built" plans.

9. As built Drawings shall be delivered to the Architect within ten (10) days of completion of

construction.



3.07 Clean Up:

A. Upon completion of electrical work, remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that

accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean, and acceptable to

the Architect.

3.08 Mechanical and Plumbing Electrical Work:

A. The requirements for electrical power and/or devices for all mechanical and plumbing

equipment supplied and/or installed under this Contract shall be coordinated and verified with

the following:

1. Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings.

2. Mechanical and Plumbing sections of these Specifications.

3. Manufacturers of the Mechanical and Plumbing equipment supplied.

B. The coordination and verification shall include the voltage, ampacity, phase, location and type

of disconnect, control, and connection required. Any changes that are required as a result of this

coordination and verification shall be a part of this Contract.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the following for all mechanical and

plumbing equipment:

1. Line voltage conduit and wiring.

2. Disconnect switches.

3. Manual line motor starters.

D. Automatic line voltage controls and magnetic starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical

and/or Plumbing Contractor and installed and connected by the Electrical Contractor. When

subcontracted for by the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor, all line voltage control

wiring installed by the Electrical Contractor shall be done per directions from the Mechanical

and/or Plumbing Contractor.

E. All low voltage control wiring for Mechanical and Plumbing equipment shall be installed in

conduit. Furnishing, installation and connection of all low voltage conduit, boxes, wiring and

controls shall be by the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor.

F. Disconnects (Motor And Circuit)

1. Disconnect switches shall be as manufactured by ITE- Siemens, General Electric or Square

D.

G. Disconnects (Motor: Fused):

1. Disconnect switches shall be provided and located at all motors.

2. Switches for three-phase motors shall be heavy-duty, horsepower rated three-pole, and

surface mounted except as noted on drawings.

3. Switches containing more than three poles shall be as specified on the drawings.

4. Switches for single-phase, fractional horsepower motors shall be heavy-duty, horsepower

rated.

5. Switches shall be horsepower rated.



H. Manual motor starters, where required, shall have toggle type operators with pilot light and

melting alloy type overload relays, SQUARE D COMPANY, Class 2510, Type FG-1P

(surface) or Type FS-1P (flush) or ITE, WESTINGHOUSE or GENERAL ELECTRIC equal.



LINE VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 – LINE VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing all wire and cable rated 600 volts or less,

including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following Specification Section for work related to the work in this Section:

1. 260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.

2. 260533 Junction and Pull Boxes.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Field tests shall be performed as specified in paragraph 3.04 of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Conductors:

A. Conductors shall be copper, type THHN/THWN/MTW oil and gasoline resistant, 600 volt

rated insulation.

B. Conductors shall be stranded copper.

C. Minimum power and control wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise noted.

D. All conductors used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2.02 Cables:

A. All individual conductors shall be copper with type THHN/THWN, 600 volt rated insulation.

B. Insulation Marking - All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to

contrast with the insulation color.

C. Color Coding - As specified in paragraph 3.03.

D. Special Wiring - Where special wiring is proposed by an equipment manufacturer, submit the

special wiring requirements to the Owner's Representative and, if approved, provide same.

Special wire shall be the type required by the equipment manufacturer.



E. Other Wiring - Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but

required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and as approved by the

Owner's Representative.

F. Manufacturer - Acceptable manufacturers including Cablec, Southwire, or equal.

2.03 Terminations:

A. Manufacturer - Terminals as manufactured by T&B, Burndy or equal.

B. Wire Terminations – Stranded conductors shall be terminated in clamping type terminations

which serve to contain all the strands of the conductor. Curling of a stranded conductor around

a screw type terminal is not allowed. For screw type terminations, use a fork type stake-on

termination on the stranded conductor. Use only a stake-on tool approved for the fork terminals

selected.

C. End Seals - Heat shrink plastic caps of proper size for the wire on which used.

2.04 Tape:

A. Tape used for terminations and cable marking shall be compatible with the insulation and

jacket of the cable and shall be of plastic material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Cable Installation:

A. Clean Raceways - Clean all raceways prior to installation of cables as specified in Section

260542 - Conduits Raceway and Fittings.

B. All line voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit.

C. All feeder conductors shall be continuous from equipment to equipment. Splices in feeders are

not permitted unless specifically noted or approved by the Electrical Engineer.

D. All branch circuit wiring shall be run concealed in ceiling spaces, walls, below floors or in

crawl spaces unless noted otherwise.

E. Cable Pulling - Exercise care in pulling wires and cables into conduit or wireways so as to

avoid kinking, putting undue stress on the cables or otherwise abrading them. No grease will

be permitted in pulling cables. Only soapstone, talc, or UL listed pulling compound will be

permitted. The raceway construction shall be complete and protected from the weather before

cable is pulled into it. Swab conduits before installing cables and exercise care in pulling, to

avoid damage to conductors.

F. Bending Radius - Cable bending radius shall be per applicable code. Install feeder cables in

one continuous length.

G. Equipment Grounding Conductors - Provide an equipment grounding conductor, whether or

not it is shown on the Drawings, in all conduits or all raceways.



H. Panelboard Wiring - In panels, bundle incoming wire and cables which are No. 6 AWG and

smaller, lace at intervals not greater than 6 inches, neatly spread into trees and connect to their

respective terminals. Allow sufficient slack in cables for alterations in terminal connections.

Perform lacing with plastic cable ties or linen lacing twine. Where plastic panel wiring duct is

provided for cable runs, lacing is not necessary when the cable is properly installed in the duct.

3.02 Cable Terminations and Splices:

A. Splices - UL Listed wirenuts.

B. Terminations - Shall comply with the following:

1. Make up and form cable and orient terminals to minimize cable strain and stress on device

being terminated on.

2. Burnish oxide from conductor prior to inserting in oxide breaking compound filled

terminal.

3.03 Circuit and Conductor Identification:

A. Color Coding - Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white

for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. Conductor colors shall be as follows:

VOLTAGE 208/120V 480/277V

Phase A Black Brown

Phase B Red Orange

Phase C Blue Yellow

Neutral White Grey

Ground Green Green

B. Color coding shall be in the conductor insulation for all conductors #10 AWG and smaller; for

larger conductors, color shall be either in the insulation or in colored plastic tape applied at

every location where the conductor is readily accessible.

C. Circuit Identification - All underground distribution and service circuits shall be provided with

plastic identification tags in each secondary box and at each termination. Tags shall identify

the source transformer of the circuit and the building number(s) serviced by the circuit.

3.04 Field Tests:

A. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and

electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and

ground of not less than the requirements of the CEC. All circuits shall be tested for proper

neutral connections.

B. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits with #2 AWG and

larger conductors to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make

these tests before all equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 500Vdc



insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall

be 2 megohms or more. Submit results for review.



GROUNDING 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes:

A. Conduits, wires, ground rods and other materials for the electrical grounding system.

1.2 Related Sections:

A. Section 260500 - Electrical General Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Ground Rod:

A. "Copperweld" ground rod conforming to or exceeding requirements of U.L. Specification

No. 467 (ANSI C-33.8). Rod shall be 3/4" diameter and 10' in length, unless otherwise

noted on the Drawings.

2.2 Below Grade Connections:

A. Compression fittings, Thomas & Betts, Series 52000, 53000 or 54000 or approved equal.

2.3 Hardware:

A. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be bronze, cadmium plated steel or other non-corrosive

materials, approved for the purpose.

2.4 Waterproof Sealant:

A. Use Kearney "Aqua Seal" mastic sealant on all below grade clamp or compression type

connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Grounding and Bonding:

A. Grounding and bonding shall be as required by codes and local authorities.

B. All electrical equipment shall be grounded, including, but not limited to, panel boards,

terminal cabinets and outlet boxes.

C. The ground pole of receptacles shall be connected to their outlet boxes by means of a

copper ground wire connecting to a screw in the back of the box.

D. A green insulated copper ground wire, sized to comply with codes, shall be installed in all

conduit runs.


GROUNDING 260526 - 2

E. All metal parts of pull boxes shall be grounded per code requirements.

F. All ground conductors shall be green insulated copper.

G. The ground system electrodes shall be tested for resistance before the equipment ground

conductors are connected. Maximum ground system resistance shall be 25 ohms. Install up

to two additional ground rods to meet the 25 ohm requirement. Multiple ground rods shall

not be less than 10 feet apart.

H. Grounding of the panels and buildings shall be completed as indicated on the Drawings.



OUTLETS, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and

equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations shown on the drawings, included

in these Specification, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility. The work

shall include but not be limited to the following:

B. Furnish and install all required material, supports and miscellaneous material for the satisfactory

interconnection of all associated electrical systems.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section.

1. 260500 General Electrical Requirements.

2. 260542 Conduits, Raceway and Fittings.

3. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Outlet boxes, Junction and Pull boxes

A. Standard Outlet Boxes: Galvanized, steel, knock-out type of size and configuration best suited to

the application indicated on the Drawings. Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square (octagon

for most light fixtures) by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required.

B. Switch boxes: Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings

as required. Install multiple switches in standard gang boxes with raised device covers suitable

for the application indicated.

C. Conduit bodies: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Conduit bodies with threaded conduit hubs and

neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of conductors or to

make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit bodies. Crouse-

Hinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton Form 35 Unilets or equal.

D. Sheet Metal Boxes: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use

a minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA I box sized to Code requirements with

covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located six inches on centers. Circle AW

Products, Hoffman Engineering Company or equal.

E. Flush Mounted Pull boxes and Junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover

retaining screws, prime coated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Outlet Boxes

A. General:

1. All outlet boxes shall finish flush with building walls, ceilings and floors except in

mechanical and electrical rooms above accessible ceiling or where exposed work is called

for on the Drawings.

2. Install raised device covers (plaster rings) on all switch and receptacle outlet boxes installed

in masonry or stud walls or in furred, suspended or exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall

be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

3. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

B. Box Layout:

1. Outlet boxes shall be installed at the locations and elevations shown on the drawings or

specified herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to

suit coordination requirements of other trades.

2. Locate switch outlet boxes on the latch side of doorways.

3. Outlet boxes shall not be installed back to back nor shall through-wall boxes be permitted.

Outlet boxes on opposite sides of a common wall shall be separated horizontally by at least

one stud or vertical structural member.

4. For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and

mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust mounting height to agree with required location

for equipment served.

5. On fire rated walls, the total face area of the outlet boxes shall not exceed 100 square inches

per 100 square feet of wall area.

C. Supports:

1. Outlet Boxes installed in metal stud walls shall be equipped with brackets designed for

attaching directly to the studs or shall be mounted on specified box supports.

2. Fixture outlet boxes installed in suspended ceiling of gypsum board or lath and plaster

construction shall be mounted to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling

runners.

3. Fixture outlet boxes installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels shall

be supported directly from the structure above where pendant mounted lighting fixture are to

be installed on the box.

4. Fixture Boxes above tile ceilings having exposed suspension systems shall be supported

directly from the structure above.



5. Outlet and / or junction boxes shall not be supported by grid or fixture hanger wires at any

locations.

3.02 Junction And Pull Boxes

A. General:

1. Install junction or pull boxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than

360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the

cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not shown on the Drawings.

2. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes in concealed locations above accessible ceilings or

exposed in electrical rooms, utility rooms or storage areas.

3. Install raised covers (plaster rings) on boxes in stud walls or in furred, suspended or exposed

concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

4. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

5. Identify circuit numbers and panel on cover of junction box with black marker pen.

B. Box Layouts:

1. Boxes above hung ceilings having concealed suspension systems shall be located adjacent to

openings for removable recessed lighting fixtures.

C. Supports:

1. Boxes installed in metal stud walls shall be equipped with brackets designed for attaching

directly to the studs or shall be mounted on specified box supports.

2. Boxes installed in suspended ceilings of gypsum board or lath and plaster construction shall

be mounted to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.

3. Boxes installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels shall be supported

directly from the structure above.

4. Boxes mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings having exposed suspension systems

shall be supported directly from the structure above.



CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 260542 - 1

SECTION 260542 – CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing conduits, raceways and

fittings as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this section:

1. 260543 Underground Ducts

2. 260544 In Grade Pull Boxes

3. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable

4. 260533 Junction and Pull Boxes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Conduits, Raceways:

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Couplings shall be compression or set-screw type.

B. Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Couplings shall be threaded type.

D. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40

(PVC-40 or NEMA Type EPC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use

with 90˚ C wires.

2.02 Conduit Supports:

A. Supports for individual conduits shall be galvanized malleable iron one-hole type with

conduit back spacer.

B. Supports for multiple conduits shall be hot-dipped galvanized Unistrut or Superstrut

channels, or approved equal. All associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized.

C. Supports for EMT conduits shall be galvanized pressed steel single hole straps.

D. Clamp fasteners shall be by wedge anchors. Shot in anchors shall not be allowed.



2.03 Fittings:

A. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors for rigid steel conduits; provide steel

compression (watertight), or steel set-screw type for EMT, (die-cast zinc or malleable

iron type fittings are not allowed). Provide threaded couplings and Meyers hubs for

rigid steel conduit exposed to weather.

B. Fittings for flexible conduit shall be Appleton, Chicago, IL, Type ST, O-Z Gedney

Series 4Q by General Signal Corp., Terryville, CT, T & B 5300 series, or approved

equal.

C. Fittings for use with rigid steel shall be galvanized steel or galvanized cast ferrous

metal; access fittings shall have gasketed cast covers and be Crouse Hinds Condulets,

Syracuse, NY, Appleton Unilets, Chicago, IL, or approved equal. Provide threaded-

type couplings and connectors; set-screw type and compression-type are not acceptable.

D. Fittings for use with rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC and have solvent-weld-

type conduit connections.

E. Union couplings for conduits shall be the Erickson type and shall be Appleton,

Chicago, IL, Type EC, O-Z Gedney 3-piece Series 4 by General Signal Corp., Terryvile,

CT, or approved equal. Threadless coupling shall not be used.

F. Bushings:

1. Bushings shall be the insulated type.

2. Bushings for rigid steel shall be insulated grounding type, O-Z Gedney Type HBLG,

Appleton Type GIB, or approved equal.

G. Conduit Sealants:

1. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free,

expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL

Classification 35L4 or as specified on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Conduit, Raceway and Fitting Installation:

A. For conduit runs exposed to weather provide rigid metal (GRS).

B. For conduit run underground, in concrete or masonry block wall and under concrete

slabs, install minimum ¾” size nonmetallic (PVC) with PVC elbows. Where conduits

transition from underground or under slab to above grade install wrapped rigid metal

(GRS) elbows and risers.



C. For conduit runs concealed in steel or wood framed walls or in ceiling spaces or

exposed in interior spaces above six feet over the finished floor, install EMT.

D. Flexible metal conduit shall be used only for the connection of recessed lighting fixtures

and motor connections unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Liquid-tight steel

flexible conduit shall be used for motor connections.

E. The minimum size raceway shall be 1/2-inch unless indicated otherwise on the

Drawings.

F. Installation shall comply with the CEC.

G. From pull point to pull point, the sum of the angles of all of the bends and offset shall

not exceed 360 degrees.

H. Conduit Supports: Properly support all conduits as required by the NEC. Run all

conduits concealed except where otherwise shown on the drawings.

1. Exposed Conduits: Support exposed conduits within three feet of any equipment or

device and at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements; wherever possible, group

conduits together and support on common supports. Support exposed conduits

fastened to the surface of the concrete structure by one-hole clamps, or with

channels. Use conduit spacers with one-hole clamps.

a. Conduits attached to walls or columns shall be as unobtrusive as possible and

shall avoid windows. Run all exposed conduits parallel or at right angles to

building lines.

b. Group exposed conduits together. Arrange such conduits uniformly and neatly.

2. Support all conduits within three feet of any junction box, coupling, bend or fixture.

3. Support conduit risers in shafts with Unistrut Superstrut, or approved equal,

channels and straps.

I. Moisture Seals: Provide in accordance with NEC paragraphs 230-8 and 300-5(g).

J. Where PVC conduit transitions from underground to above grade, provide rigid steel

90’s with risers. Rigid steel shall be half-lap wrapped with 20 mil tape and extend

minimum 12” above grade.

K. Provide a nylon pull cord in each empty raceway.

L. Provide galvanized rigid steel factory fittings for galvanized rigid steel conduit.

M. Slope all underground raceways to provide drainage; for example, slope conduit from

equipment located inside a building to the pull box or manhole located outside the

building.



N. Conduits shall be blown out and swabbed prior to pulling wires, or installation of pull

cord in empty conduits.



UNDERGROUND DUCTS 260543 - 1

SECTION 260543 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing raceways, raceway spacers with

necessary excavation.

1.02 Related Work:


1. 02200 Excavation and Backfill

2. 260542 Conduit Raceway and Fittings

1.03 Standards and Codes:

A. Work and material shall be in compliance with and according to the requirements of the latest

revision of the following standards and codes.

1. National Electrical Code (NEC) (Latest Revision)

2. California Electrical Code (CEC).

3. Underground Installations CEC - Article 300.5

4. Rigid NonMetallic Conduit CEC - Article 347

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Raceways:

A. As specified in Section 260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Excavation:

A. As specified in Section 02200, Excavation and Backfill and as required for the work shown on

the Drawings.

3.02 Install raceways as indicated on drawings.

3.03 Sand Encasement:

A. As specified in Section 02200 - Excavation and Backfill.


UNDERGROUND DUCTS 260543 - 2

3.04 Backfill:

A. As specified in Section 02200 - Excavation and Backfill.



IN GRADE PULL BOXES 260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 – IN GRADE PULL BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this section consists of providing all labor, supervision, tools, materials, and

performing all work necessary to furnish and install pre-cast concrete vaults, and pull boxes

with necessary excavation.

1.02 Related Work:


1. 02200 Excavation and Backfill.

2. 260543 Underground Ducts.

1.03 Submittals:

A. As specified in Section 260500 and Division 01.

1. Catalog Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature - Pre-cast Vaults, Pull

Boxes and Accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Materials and Equipment:

A. General Requirements:

1. Pull boxes for electrical power, controls and other communication circuits shall consist of

pre-cast reinforced concrete boxes, extensions' bases, and covers as specified herein and as

indicated on the Drawings. Pre-cast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes. Acceptable manufacturers

are Christy, Utility Vault, Brooks, Associated Concrete or equal.

B. Construction:

1. Pre-cast concrete vaults and pull boxes for electrical power distribution and

communication circuits with associated risers and tops shall conform to ASTM C478 and

ACI 318. Pull boxes shall be the type noted on the Drawings and shall be constructed in

accordance with the applicable details as shown. Tops and walls shall consist of reinforced

concrete. Walls and bottom shall be of monolithic concrete construction. Duct entrances

and windows shall be located near the corners of structures to facilitate cable racking.

C. Covers:


IN GRADE PULL BOXES 260544 - 2

1. The word "ELECTRICAL" shall be cast in the top face of all electrical cable boxes. The

word “Signal” or “Fire Alarm” shall be cast in the top of the boxes utilized for these

systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Installation:

A. Install pull boxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360 degrees or

where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable to be

installed. Note that these boxes are not shown on the Drawings.

B. Pre-cast pull boxes shall be installed approximately where indicated on the Drawings. The

exact location of each pull box shall be determined after careful consideration has been given

to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving. All cable boxes and secondary pull boxes

shall be installed with a minimum of 6-inch thick crushed rock or sand bedding.

C. Paved areas - Vaults and pull boxes located in areas to be paved shall be installed such that the

top of the cover shall be flush with the finished surface of the paving.

D. Unpaved Areas - In unpaved areas, the top of vaults and pull box covers shall be approximately

2 inches above finished grade.

E. Joint Seals - Section joints of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes shall be sealed with compound as

recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction - Trenching, backfilling and compaction shall be as

specified in Section 02200 - Excavation and Backfill.



TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

SECTION 262200 – TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this section consists of providing dry type transformers as shown on Drawings and

as described in this section.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this section.


2. 260526 Grounding.

1.03 Submittals: In accordance with Division 01.

A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's name and nameplate data as follows:

1. KVA rating.

2. Nominal primary voltage.

3. Tap voltages.

4. Nominal secondary voltage.

5. Percent impedance.

6. Weight.

7. Physical dimensions and mounting requirements.

B. Submit manufacturer's no-load loss value for transformer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit the manufacturer's operation and maintenance data

in accordance with Division 01. Copies of the factory and field test reports shall be included in

this submittal.

1.04 Factory Testing:

A. Tests on transformers shall include the manufacturer's standard tests, including winding

resistance, ratio, polarity, phase relation, no-load loss, impedance, full load losses, and

dielectric tests. Certified copies shall show compliance with all referenced standards.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.01 Dry Type Transformer:

A. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, general purpose transformers for supplying lighting

and small power loads shall be dry type, two winding, 60 Hertz, aluminum windings,

temperature rise not exceeding 150C under full load in an ambient of 40C, with Class H 220

C insulation. Capacity rating, number of phases and voltages shall be as shown on the

Drawings. Transformer shall comply with all applicable provisions of NEMA Standard ST20

and shall have NEMA Standard taps. Transformers rated below 15 KVA shall have two (2) 5%

full capacity taps below rated primary volts and transformers rated 15 KVA and above shall

have six (6) 2-1/2% full capacity taps, two above the four below nominal voltage Terminal

compartment shall have a temperature rise not to exceed 35C. Provide unit UL listed for

indoor/outdoor mounting. Provide dry-type transformer as manufactured by Square D,

Siemens, General Electric Company or approved equal.

B. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operated

at 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accordance with NEMA TP-2.

C. Transformers installed outdoors shall be NEMA 3R, Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

D. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following values;

1. 0-9 KVA 40 decibels

2. 10-50 KVA 45 decibels

3. 51-150KVA 50 decibels



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Transformer Installation:

A. Transformer shall be where indicated on the Drawings. Indoor transformers shall have code and

manufacturers recommended clearances from adjacent walls. In no case should this clearance

be less than six inches.

B. Transformer shall be connected with flexible liquid tight metallic conduit to prevent the

transmission of sound through the conduit system. All transformers shall be installed on

resilient vibration-isolating mounting pads.

C. Transformer neutral grounding shall be sized in accordance with requirements for separately

derived systems and shall be connected to the nearest cold water pipe with supplementary

driven ground. Ground rod and connections shall be as detailed in Section 260526.

3.02 Field Tests:

A. Insulation-Resistance Tests: 480 volt windings shall be tested with a 1000 volt megohm meter;

208 or 240 shall be tested with a 500 volt megohm meter. All tests shall be applied for not less

than 5 minutes and until three consecutive readings, one minute part, are obtain. Readings shall

be recorded every 30 seconds for the first two minutes and every minute thereafter.



B. Acceptance: Acceptance with be based on satisfactory completion of the insulation resistance

tests.



PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 – PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing panelboards and circuit breakers as shown on the

Drawings and as described herein.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this Section.

1. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable

2. 260526 Grounding

3. 262816 Circuit Breakers

1.03 Submittals:

A. Shop Drawings - As specified in Division 01 and Section 260500. For each panelboard and

distribution panel furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data, and

the following information:

1. Panelboard / distribution panel type.

2. Main bus and terminal connection sizes.

3. Location of line connections.

4. Cabinet dimension.

5. Gutter space.

6. Gauge of boxes and fronts.

7. Finish data.

8. Voltage rating.

9. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip rating, and interrupting ratings.

10. When information is available on the Drawings, show breaker circuit numbers and

locations along with trip ratings on a panelboard layout.

B. Single Submittal - A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this

Section.



C. Closeout Submittals: Submit operation and maintenance data for panelboards and circuit

breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, factory and field test reports, recommended

maintenance procedures and typewritten as-built panel schedules. Submit in accordance with

Division 01.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 Panelboards:

A. General: Lighting and Receptacle Panelboards shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The

number and arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares and blank spaces for future circuit

breakers shall be as shown on the Drawings or, if not shown, 42 circuits. All circuit breakers

shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, bolt-on type (unless otherwise noted on

drawings ), with 1, 2 or 3 poles a shown, each with a single operating handle. Tandem or

piggy-back breakers shall not be used.

B. Nameplates:

1. Each panelboard shall have a field mounted identifying, rigid, plastic nameplate giving the

panel identification as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each panelboard shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage, bus rating,

number of phases, frequency and number of wires.

C. Construction:

1. Door and trim shall be finished to match finish type and color of surrounding wall. Box

shall be hot-dip galvanized, field finished to match the front.

2. Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to requirements of all relevant codes.

Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment.

3. Panelboards shall be furnished with hinged trim fronts with key latch and a typed directory

card and holder. Panelboard circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and

even numbers on the right. Provide weatherproof, NEMA type 3R enclosures for outdoor

installation.

D. Busbars: Panelboard busbars shall be phase sequence type suitable for bolt-on circuit breakers.

All busbars shall be copper.

E. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with trip and interrupting

ratings as shown on the Drawings.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Panelboard manufacturer shall be Square D.

2.02 Distribution Panels:

A. General: Distribution panels shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The number and

arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares and blank spaces for future circuit breakers shall be



as shown on the Drawings. All circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-

magnetic bolt-on type, with 1, 2 or 3 poles a shown, each with a single operating handle.

Tandem or piggy-back breakers shall not be used.

B. Nameplates:

1. Each distribution panel shall have a field mounted, identifying, rigid, plastic nameplate

giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each distribution panel shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage, bus

rating, number of phases, frequency and number of wires.

C. Construction:

1. Door and trim shall be finished to match color of surrounding wall. Box shall be hot-dip

galvanized, field finished to match the front.

2. Distribution panels and enclosures shall conform to requirements of all relevant codes.

Distribution panels shall be suitable for use as service.

3. Distribution panels shall have a front door with key latch and a typed directory card and

permanently attached holder. Adhesive backed holders are not acceptable. Distribution

panels circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the

right. Provide weatherproof, NEMA type 3R enclosures for outdoor installation.

D. Busbars: Distribution panels busbars shall be phase sequence type suitable for bolt-on circuit

breakers. All busbars shall be copper, sized for a maximum current density of 1000A psi.

E. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with trip and interrupting

ratings as shown on the Drawings.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Distribution panel manufacturer shall be Square D.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 Installation: Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be installed where indicated on the

Drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 Mounting:

A. Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be mounted with the top of the box 6'-6" above the

floor. Panelboards and Distribution Panels shall be plumb within 1/8-inch. The highest breaker

operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor.

3.03 Field Tests:

A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits with #2 AWG and

larger conductors to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make

these tests after all equipment has been connected, except that equipment which may be

damaged by the test voltage shall not be connected. Test the insulation with a 500Vdc



insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall

be 2 megohms or more. Submit results for review.

B. Grounding: Grounding shall conform to Section 260526.

C. Continuity: Panelboard and Distribution Panel circuits shall be tested for continuity prior to

energizing. Continuity tests shall be conducted using a dc device with a bell or buzzer.



DEVICES WIRING 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 – DEVICES WIRING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 Description of Work

A. The work of this section consists of:

1. Furnishing, installing, and connecting all duplex receptacles complete with wall plates

and/or covers, as shown on the Drawings.

2. Furnishing, installing and connecting all light switches complete with wall plates and or

handle operators, as shown on the Drawings.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section:

1. 260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.



1.03 Submittals: As specified in Section 260500 and Division 01.

A. Submit manufacturers published descriptive literature properly marked to identify the items to

be supplied.

B. A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 Receptacles:

A. General - Receptacles shall be heavy duty, high abuse, grounding type.

B. Duplex Receptacles:

1. Receptacles shall be specification grade, rated 20 ampere, two-pole, 3-wire, 125 volt,

NEMA 5-20 configuration, self-grounding with screw terminals. Color shall be as selected

by the Architect.

2. Devices shall have a nylon face, back and side wired.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #DR20 Series, Leviton #16352.



C. GFCI Receptacles:

1. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, conforming to NEMA 5-20

configuration. Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have an LED type red indicator

light, test and reset push buttons. Color shall be as selected by the Architect.

2. GFCI component shall meet UL 943 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second

at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Operating range shall extend from -31F to 158F.

Unit shall have transient voltage protection and shall be ceramic encapsulated for

protection against moisture.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #GF20_ _LA, Leviton #7899 Series.

D. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles:

1. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, conforming to NEMA 5-20

configuration, Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have a LED type red indicator

light, test and reset push buttons. Color shall be as selected by the architect.

2. GFCI component shall meet UL 943 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second

at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Operating range shall extend from -31F to 158F.

Unit shall have transient voltage protection and shall be ceramic encapsulated for

protection against moisture.

3. Manufacturer: Hubbell #GFTR20 _ _ Series, Leviton # W7899-TR Series.

2.02 Switches:

A. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes to 120/277 volts ac. Units shall be flush mounted, self-

grounding, quiet operating rocker devices. Rocker color shall be as selected by the Architect.

1. Manufacturer: Hubbell #DS_20_ _ Series, Leviton #5621 Series. See plans for single pole,

three way and four way requirements.

B. Timed switches: Shall be as designed by Paragon Electric Company # ET2000f or Watt Stopper

TS-200 rated for the voltage specified on drawings. Time-out shall be adjustable from 5

minutes up to 12 hours. Unit shall be provided with warning alarm.

C. Dimmer switches: Switch shall be a specified on drawings, color per architect. Heat fins shall

not be removed, where dimmer switches are ganged together, care shall be taken to install

correct size backbox to accommodate switches without removing fins.

2.03 Plates:

A. General - Plates shall be of the style and color to match the wiring devices, and of the required

number of gangs. Plates shall conform with NEMA WD 1 , UL 514 and FS W-P-455A. Plates

on finished walls shall be non-metallic or stainless steel. Plates on unfinished walls and on

fittings shall be of zinc plated steel or case metal and shall have rounded corners and beveled

edges.



B. Non-Metallic: Plates shall be plain with beveled edges and shall be nylon or reinforced

fiberglass.

C. Stainless Steel: Plates shall be .040 inches thick with beveled edges and shall be manufactured

from No. 430 alloy having a brushed or satin finish.

D. Cast Metal: Plates shall be cast or malleable iron covers with gaskets so as to be moisture

resistant or weatherproof.

E. Blank Plates: Cover plates for future telephone outlets shall match adjacent device wall plates

in appearance and construction.

F. Weatherproof Plate: Cover plates in wet and damp locations shall have recessed in-use covers,

Taymac or equal. Back box shall be suitable for the wall material where it is installed.

G. Labeling: All switch and receptacle plates shall be labeled on the top portion of the plate with

the panelboard and circuit number serving that device. Lettering shall be 3/16” minimum high,

black color, on clear Mylar 3/8” tape. Manufactured by P-touch or equal.


3.01 Installation of Wiring Devices:

A. Interior Locations: In finished walls, install each device in a flush mounted box with washers

as required to bring the device mounting strap level with the surface of the finished wall. On

unfinished walls, surface mount boxes level and plumb.

B. Mounting Heights: Adjust boxes so that the front edge of the box shall not be farther back from

the finished wall plane than 1/4-inch. Adjust boxes so that they do not project beyond the

finished wall. Height of device shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the drawings:

1. Receptacles 15 Inches from finished floor to bottom of box.

2. Toggle Switches 48 Inches from finished floor to top of box.

C. Receptacles:

1. Ground each receptacle using a grounding conductor, not a yoke or screw contact.

2. Install receptacles with connections spliced to the branch circuit wiring in such a way that

removal of the receptacle will not disrupt neutral continuity and branch circuit power will

not be lost to other receptacles in the same circuit.

3.02 Installation of Wall Plates:

A. General - Plates shall match the style of the device and shall be plumb within 1/16-inch of the

vertical or horizontal.

B. Interior Locations, Finished Walls: Install non-metallic plates so that all four edges are in

continuous contact with the finished wall surfaces. Plaster filling will not be permitted. Do not

use oversized plates or sectional plates.



C. Interior (not wet) Locations, Unfinished Walls: Install stainless steel or cast metal cover plates.

D. Wet Locations: Install cast metal plates with gaskets on wiring devices in such a manner as to

provide a rain tight weatherproof installation. Cover shall be [lockable] outdoor “in use” type.

E. Future Locations: Install blanking cover plates on all unused outlets.

3.03 Tests:

A. Receptacles:

1. After installation of receptacles, energize circuits and test each receptacle to detect lack of

ground continuity, reversed polarity, and open neutral condition.



CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-1

SECTION 262816 – CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings and

as described herein.

1.02 Related Work: See the following Specification Sections for work related to the work in this Section.

A. 260500 General Electrical Requirements

B. 262413 Switchboards

C. 262416 Panelboards and Distribution Panels

1.03 Submittals:

A. Shop Drawings - Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 260500 and Division 01. For

each circuit breaker furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data,

and the following information:

1. Terminal connection sizes.

2. Voltage rating.

3. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip ratings and interrupting ratings.

B. Single Submittal - A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this

Section.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with and Section 260500, operation and

maintenance data for circuit breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, manufacturer's

circuit breaker timer, current, coordination curves, factory and field test reports and

recommended maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Circuit Breaker: Each circuit breaker shall consist of the following:

A. A molded case breaker with an over center toggle-type mechanism, providing quick-make,

quick-break action. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual

thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Multipole circuit breakers shall have variable

magnetic trip elements which are set by a single adjustment to assure uniform tripping

characteristics in each pole. Circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on type unless otherwise noted.

B. Breaker shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40C.

C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free.


CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816-2

D. Three pole breakers shall be common trip.

E. The circuit breakers shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connection at either end of

the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker shall be suitable for mounting and operation in any position.

F. Breakers shall be rated as shown on Drawings.

G. Circuit breaker and/or Fuse/circuit breaker combinations for series connected interrupting

ratings shall be listed by UL as recognized component combinations for use in the end use

equipment in which it is installed. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the

end use equipment per CEC section 110-22.

H. Breakers shall be UL listed. Circuit breakers shall have removable lugs.

I. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors.

J. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical screw type lugs.

K. Circuit breakers serving HACR rated loads shall be HACR type. Circuit breakers serving other

motor loads shall be motor rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Mounting:

A. The highest breaker operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor.



LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 – LIGHTING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The work of this section consists of providing a lighting system complete, including fixtures,

lamps, hangers, reflectors, glassware, lenses, auxiliary equipment, ballasts and sockets.

1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section:

1. 260500 General Electrical Requirements.

2. 260542 Conduit, Raceway and Fittings.



1.03 Submittals: In accordance with Division 01.

A. Submit descriptive data, photometric curves for each fixture configuration proposed.

B. Submit shop drawings showing proposed methods for mounting lighting fixtures.

C. Seismic Requirements: Submit:

1. Sketch or description of the anchorage system.

D. Submit Operation and Maintenance Data per Division 01.

1.04 Warranty: High Intensity Discharge lamps which fail within the first year after final acceptance

shall be replaced by the Contractor with the warranty clause of the General Provisions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 Fixtures

A. Fixtures shall be of the types, wattage's and voltages shown on the Drawings and be UL

classified and labeled for the intended use.

B. Substitutions will not be considered unless the photometric distribution curve indicates the

proposed fixture is equal to or exceeds the specified luminaire.

C. Luminaire wire, and the current carrying capacity thereof shall be in accordance with the CEC.

D. Luminaires and lighting equipment shall be delivered to the project site complete, with

suspension accessories, aircraft cable, stems, canopies, hickeys, castings, sockets, holders,

ballasts, diffusers, frames, and related items, including support and braces.


LIGHTING 265100 - 2

2.02 Ballasts:

A. Ballasts shall be of the types shown on the drawings. Ballasts shall be CBM certified and bear

the UL label. Magnetic ballasts shall be the high power factor type. Electronic ballasts shall be

suitable for lamps specified by Advance, Magnetek/Universal, Motorola or approved equal.

Electronic ballast shall be CBM certified and have a 10% maximum total harmonic distortion.

B. All ballasts for fixtures installed outdoors shall provide reliable starting of lamps at 0F at 90%

of the nominal line voltage.

C. Ballasts producing excessive noise (above 36 dB) or vibration will be rejected and shall be

replaced at no expense to the Owner.

2.03 Lamps:

A. Lamps shall be new at the time of acceptance and shall be General Electric, Osram /Sylvania,

Phillips, or approved equal.

B. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, lamps shall be third generation T8, 3500K, and 85

CRI minimum.

1. Third Generation: Also known as High-Performance, Higher Lumen, or Super, the third

generation of 32 Watt T8 lamps offers 3,100 lumens and a long-life rating of 24,000 hours.

Efficacy is high, with lumens per watt in the range of 94 to 100. CRI is 82 to 86.


3.01 Installation:

A. General:

1. All fixtures and luminaires shall be clean and lamps shall be operable at the time of

acceptance.

2. Install luminaires in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, complete with lamps,

ready for operation as indicated.

3. Align, mount, and level the luminaires uniformly.

4. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where an indicated position

conflicts with equipment locations, change the location of the luminaire by the minimum

distance necessary.

B. Mounting and Supports:

1. Mounting heights shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise shown, mounting

height shall be measured to the centerline of the outlet box for wall mounted fixtures and

to the bottom of the fixture for suspended fixtures and to the bottom of the fixture for all

other types.


LIGHTING 265100 - 3

2. Luminaire supports shall be anchored to structural members.

3. Pendant stem mounted luminaires shall be provided with ball aligners to assure a plumb

installation and shall have a minimum 45 degree clean swing from horizontal in all

directions. Sway bracing shall be installed as required to limit the movement of the fixture.

Fixtures shall be allowed to sway a maximum of 45º without striking any object.

4. Fixture supports shall be designed to resist earthquake forces of seismic zone 4.

5. Refer to fixture mounting details on drawings for installation requirements.

6. Pendant cable mounted luminaries shall be provided with fully adjustable stainless steel

aircraft cable hangers unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.



FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283100 - 1

SECTION 283100 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Furnish and install all materials and equipment including all required equipment, panels,

raceways, conductors and connections. Provide all labor required and necessary to complete

the work shown on the drawings and/or specified in all Sections of Division 26 and all other

work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, but reasonably inferred for the

extension of the existing addressable fire alarm system installation including all accessories and

appurtenances required for testing the systems. It is in the intent of the drawings and

specifications that all systems will be complete, and ready for operation. No extra charge will

be paid for furnishing items required by regulations, but not specified herein, or on drawings.

B. The contractor scope of work shall not degrade any function or operation of the remaining site

fire alarm system.

1.02 Related work:

A. Division 00 General Conditions, Division 01 General Requirements.

B. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this section.

1. All other sections of Division 26.

1.03 Codes and Standards:

A. Devices and equipment for fire alarm systems shall be U.L. listed.

B. UL 864 Control Units, Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

C. Devices and equipment for fire alarm system shall be listed by the California State Fire Marshal

for the specific purpose the device or equipment is used.

D. Work and material shall be in compliance with and according to the requirements of the latest

version of the following standards and codes:

1. California Fire Code (CFC) based on the International Fire Code (IFC) with California

Amendments.

2. California Building Code (CBC) based on the International Building Code (IBC) with

California Amendments.



3. California Electric Code (CEC) based on the National Electric Code (NEC) and California

Amendments.

4. California Mechanical Code (CMC) based on the Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) and


5. California Plumbing Code (CPC) based on the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) and


6. Title 19 C.C.R., Public Safety, State Fire Marshals Regulations.

7. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.

1.04 Submittals:

A. In accordance with Division 26.

B. Submit the following items:

1. Manufacturer’s Catalog Data: Manufacturer’s original catalog cuts and original description

of data of all material and equipment with sufficient information provided so that the exact

function of each device is known. Each item supplied shall be clearly identified including

both U.L. number and a copy of the State Fire Marshal’s listing.

C. Description of conductors to be used with a statement that all wire shall be in conduit.

1.05 Quality Assurance:

A. Installer: The installation firm shall be an established communications and electronics

contractor with at least 10 years successful installation experience of products utilizing

integrated communications systems and equipment specific to that required for this project. The

firm shall currently maintain and locally run and operated business. Only California Certified

fire alarm technicians or California Certified electrician shall be used to install the fire alarm

system. Provide proof to district that all employees are California Certified to install the fire

alarm system.

B. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new, and free from any defects. All items of

equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer unless otherwise

specified, shall function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s

complete service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections.

C. The Contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains a fully

equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the

system. The contractor shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper



proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being

supplied.

1.06 Warranties:

A. The contractor shall warrant all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and

electrical defect for one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance. The contractor shall

without additional expense to the owner, replace any defective materials or equipment provided

by him under this contract within the warranty period.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 Fire Alarm Control Panel:

A. The FACP is existing to remain.

2.02 Detection Devices:

A. Manual Pull Stations:

1. Provide non coded, addressable, semi-recessed, double-action type manual pull station with

mechanical reset features. Where installed in existing buildings, boxes may be surface-

mounted. Surface mounted boxes shall be the same color as the pull stations.

2. Provide separate screw terminal for each conductor connected to the manual alarm pull

station. Break-glass-front pull stations will not be permitted. Provide red aluminum,

housing labeled “fire”. The pull stations shall not be resettable without the use of a key.

[Provide Stopper II Guards for all manual stations in public areas].

B. Detectors:

1. Each photoelectric smoke detector and heat detector shall be interchangeable via twist-lock

mounting base, to ensure matching the proper sensor to the potential hazards of the areas

being protected. The system shall recognize when an improper sensor type has been

installed in a previously programmed sensor type location.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detector:

1. Provide white flame retardant plastic, addressable, analog, photoelectric type, smoke

detectors. Detectors shall operate using an optical sensing chamber principal which

complies with UL 268.

2. Each detector shall be capable of being set at two sensitivity settings.

3. Each detector shall have two LED visual indicators providing local 360 degree visibility of

operating status and alarm indication.



4. Each detector shall be supported independently of wiring connections, and connected by

separate screw terminals of each conductor.

5. The detector screen and cover assembly must be easily removable for field cleaning.

D. Combination Fixed Temperature, rate of Rise Heat Detectors:

1. Provide off-white flame retardant plastic, addressable, combination 140 degree F fixed

temperature, rate of rise heat dual thermistor detectors. Detector shall initiate an alarm

when temperature rises at a rate of over 15 degrees F per minute or above 140 degrees F.

2. Each detector shall have two LED visual indicators providing local 360 degree visibility of

operating status and alarm indication.

3. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate or rise principal. Locate detectors in

accordance with UL FPD or FM P7825 listing and the requirements of NFPA 72.

Temperature rating of detectors shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

E. Addressable Monitor Module: provide addressable monitor module wired as style B (class “B”)

to provide an address for normally open contact devices.

1. Provide Addressable Monitor Module to monitor status of all Water flow Switches, Valve

tamper Switches and Post Indicator Valves.

2.03 Alarm Notification Devices:

A. Color of notification appliances shall be red, unless otherwise noted by District.

B. All alarm notification devices shall be synchronized throughout the school campus.

C. Strobe Lights: Provide recessed mounted strobe light assembly suitable for use in electrically

supervised circuit. Lamps shall be xenon flashtube type, powered from the fire alarm control

panel alarm signaling circuit. Strobes shall provide candela ratings as indicated on the drawings

candelas and flash 60 times per minute unless otherwise noted. Strobes in toilets shall provide a

minimum of 15 candelas. Lamps shall be protected be a clear polycarbonate lens. Housing shall

be labeled “FIRE” in red vertical lettering.

D. Horns/Strobes: Provide recessed mounted, grille face, vibrating diaphragm type, audio alarm

devices consisting of an electro-mechanical horn suitable for use in an electrically supervised

circuit. Horn/Strobes shall be provided with a red, tamper resistant grill. Horn shall have a

minimum sound rating of 90 DBA at 10 feet and have field selectable sound levels. Horns shall

be capable of providing a synchronized, field selectable, temporal code 3 tone. Horns shall have

a separate minimum candela as shown on the drawings and flash 60 times per minute unless

otherwise noted. Lamps shall be protected by a clear polycarbonate lens. Housing shall be

labeled “FIRE” in red vertical lettering.



E. Horns: Provide recessed mounted, grille face, vibrating diaphragm type, audio alarm devices

consisting of an electro-mechanical horn suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit.

Horns shall be provided with a red, tamper resistant grill. Horn shall have a minimum sound

rating of 90 DBA at 10 feet and have field selectable sound levels. Horns shall be capable of

providing a synchronized, field selectable, temporal code 3 tone. Horns shall have a separate

screw terminal for each conductor connection.

F. Exterior Horns: Provide recessed mounted, grille face, vibrating diaphragm type, audio alarm

devices consisting of an electro-mechanical horn suitable for use in an electrically supervised

circuit. Horns shall be provided with a red, tamper resistant grill, and a weatherproof backbox.

Horn shall have a minimum sound rating of 90 DBA at 10 feet and have field selectable sound

levels. Horns shall be capable of providing a synchronized, field selectable, temporal code 3

tone. Horns shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor connection. Horns located

in areas subject to moisture or exterior atmospheric conditions, shall be approved for such

locations.

2.04 Wiring and Conduit:

A. Provide wiring in accordance with NFPA 72.

B. Conductors shall be solid copper. Conductors for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG

minimum; conductors for low-voltage DC circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum for

annunciation circuits and No. 14 AWG minimum for initiation circuits. All cables shall be

rated and code compliant for their use.

1. All low voltage wiring not installed in conduits shall be plenum rated.

2. Provide color-coded conductors. Identify conductors by plastic-coated, self-sticking,

printed markers or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Each conductor used for the same specific

function shall be distinctly color coded. Use different color codes for each interior circuit.

Each circuit color code wire shall remain uniform throughout the circuit.

3. Pigtail or “T” tap connections to the evacuation alarm horns, horn/strobes and strobes are

not acceptable.

4. Underground circuit or circuits in wet areas shall be gel filled cables in scheduled 40 PVC

conduit. There shall be no splicing of any underground cables.

C. Conduits:

1. Identification of Conduit: New conduits containing fire alarm system conductors shall be,

¾” minimum. Junction-boxes, covers, gutters, and terminal cabinets, containing fire alarm

system conductors, shall be painted red or provided red in color with engraved plastic

identification signs permanently attached to the equipment.



2. Do not run fire alarm circuits in the same conduit with the non-fire alarm circuits.

3. Do not run AC circuits in the same conduit with the fire alarm circuits.

4. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit for exterior installations or where exposed to damage.

5. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practical in existing

construction. Conduit runs shall be straight, neatly arranged properly supported and parallel

or perpendicular to walls and partitions. Identify conductors within each enclosure where a

tap, splice, or termination is made.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Installation:

A. Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance

with the NFPA publications and as modified herein.

B. Follow manufacturer’s directions in all cases for installation, testing and energizing.

C. Accurately set, level, support, and fasten all equipment.

D. Smoke and heat detectors:

1. No detector shall be located closer than 12 inches to any part of any lighting fixture.

Detectors, located in areas subject to moisture or exterior atmospheric conditions, or

hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70, shall be approves for such locations.

E. Conduit where exposed shall be installed parallel with the walls or structural elements; vertical

runs to be plumb; horizontal runs to be level or parallel with structure; conduit grouped neatly

together with straight runs, all bends parallel and uniformly spaced.

F. Earthquake Resistant installation/fastening of all electrical equipment shall conform to the

general requirements of section 1614A of the California Building Code.

3.02 Preliminary Tests:

A. Conduct the following tests during installation of wiring and system components. Correct

deficiency pertaining to these requirements prior to formal functional and operational tests of

the system, preliminary tests shall be performed in the presence of the Local Fire Authority and

Project inspector of Record to determine the conformance with the specified requirements.

B. Ground Resistance: Measure the resistance of each connection to ground. Ground resistance

shall not exceed 10 ohms.



C. Dielectric Strength insulation Resistance: Test the dielectric strength and the Insulating

resistance of the system interconnecting wiring by means of an instrument capable of

generating 500 volts of DC and equipped to indicate leakage current 1000 megohms. For the

purpose of this test, connect the instrument between each conductor on the line and between

each conductor and ground at the control panel end of the line, with the other extremity open

circuited and all series-connected devices in place. The system shall withstand the test without

breakdown and shall indicate a resistance of not less than 1.0 minute with a DC potential of not

less than 100 volts and not more than 500 volts.

D. Standby Battery Test: prior to formal inspection and tests, place the fire alarm system on

standby battery power for 24 [60] hours; immediately thereafter, sound the building evacuation

alarm signaling devices for 5 minutes. When the test is complete, the fire alarm system battery

charger shall be fully recharged within 24 hours.

E. Field Inspection and Test:

1. Before final acceptance of the work, pre-test system to demonstrate compliance with the

contract requirements. System shall be subjected to complete functional and operational

tests, including tests in place of each detector. When tests have been completed and

corrections made, submit a signed and dated NFPA Certificate of Completion along with a

completed testing matrix with the request for formal inspection and tests.

2. Where application of heat would destroy a heat detector, it may be manually activated.

3. Verify the proper receipt of the alarm signals at the central station for the UDACT provide

printout of test reports. It shall be the sole obligation of the contractor to coordinate and to

provide all testing documentation from the central station.

4. The communication loops and the indicating appliance circuits shall be opened in at least

two locations per zone to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry.

5. Perform the field inspection and test in the presence of the manufacturer’s representative,

the owner’s representative, local Fire Authority and Project Inspector of Record (IOR).

6. Test equipment: It shall be the responsibility of the installing Contractor to furnish tools,

instruments, and materials required for a thorough test of the system. This includes, but is

not limited to, the following:

a. VOM meter

b. Manufacturer’s recommended smoke detector testing device and sensitivity test

equipment.

c. Heat source for testing heat detectors.

d. Keys to all control panels.



e. Ladders

3.03 Project Closeout:

A. As Built Drawings:

1. Provide a complete set (full size scalable) of reproducible “as-built” and AutoCAD format

drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, and wire tag notations for exact locations

of all installed equipment, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal

wiring of the equipment upon completion of system.

B. Operating and Instruction Manuals:

1. Operating and Instruction manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of the system. Four

complete sets of operation and instructions manuals shall be delivered to the owner upon

request.

2. Complete, accurate, step-by-step testing instructions giving recommended and required

testing frequency of all equipment, methods for testing each individual piece of equipment,

and troubleshooting manual explaining how to test the preliminary internal parts or each

piece of equipment shall be delivered upon completion of the system.

C. Maintenance instructions shall be complete, easy to read, understandable, and shall provide the

following information:

1. Instructions on replacing any components of the system, including internal parts.

2. Instructions on periodic cleaning and adjustment of equipment with a schedule of these

functions.

3. A complete list of all equipment and components with information as to the address and

telephone number of both the manufacturer and local supplier of each item.

4. User operating instructions shall be provided prominently displayed on a separate sheet

located next to the control unit in accordance with U.L. Standard 864.




EARTHWORK 31 05 13 - 1

SECTION 310513 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Clearing, including removal of trees, tree roots, paving, planters, existing improvements and

anything necessary to complete the work on or below grade.

2. Scarifying and compacting the subbase below areas to receive new pavement or aggregate

base sections according to the plans.

3. Excavating, filling, grading, and compaction for the preparation of subgrade for asphalt

pavement for the areas as shown on the plans.

4. Over excavating, chemically treating, and recompation for the preparation of subgrade for

concrete structures.

5. Disposal of debris, topsoil and surplus material. Debris and surplus material shall be disposed

of off College property at a legal disposal facility.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 71 23 – Field Engineering.

2. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

3. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching.

4. Section 03 30 00 – Concrete Site Work

5. Section 32 12 16 – Flexible Pavement.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Standards listed below, with their designation in parenthesis, apply where designation is cited in

this Section. Where the applicable year of adoption or revision is not listed below, the latest

edition applies.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. "Test Method for Moisture of Soils and Aggregate Using Nuclear Gage" (ASTM D3017).

2. "Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Method" (ASTM D2922).

3. "Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils" (ASTM D4318).

C. State of California, Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications", (CSS) July 1999,

English Units. When applying the cited standards, the following should be understood.




1. Terms such as Commission, Department or Agency shall mean the College. 2. Terms such as Director, Executive Officer, or Engineer shall mean the College’s

Representative.

3. In case of discrepancies between the cited standards and this Section, this Section governs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fill: All soil and aggregate materials placed to raise grade of site and/or roadways or to fill

around buried vaults or to backfill excavations.

B. Relative Compaction: Ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the field dry density to the maximum

dry density of a representative sample of the same material determined by ASTM D1557.

C. Field Density: In-place compacted dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D2922 or

ASTM D1556 at the discretion of the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Stockpile Area: Off-site construction staging area designated for temporary stockpiling of native

and/or imported material; location and limits as approved by the College’s Representative.

E. Paved Area: Areas outside of building envelope to be covered by concrete or asphalt.

F. Unstable or "Pumping" Surface: Compacted soil or aggregate which, in the opinion of the

College’s Geotechnical Engineer, shows unacceptable deflection either vertically or laterally,

under loading of construction equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

B. Samples as requested by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer -- Refer to SOURCE QUALITY

CONTROL Article of this Section.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Job Conditions: 1. Off-site Access: Verify all limitations imposed by public jurisdictions on off-site construction

routes.

2. On-site Access: Use on-site access routes designated by the College’s Representative. Maintain and clean these routes during construction. At completion of construction restore routes to original condition at no additional cost to the College.

3. Unusual Site Conditions: If unusual site conditions not defined by the Contract Documents are

encountered notify the College’s Representative immediately.

4. Maintain and restore routes as required and accepted by the College’s Representative to provide for pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular traffic during construction.

B. Environmental Requirements:




1. Water Control: Construct erosion control measures as required to keep site and adjacent areas

free from excess water at all times. Keep excavated areas dry by pumping excess water in manner accepted by the College’s Representative. All work shall be in accordance with Section 01 57 23 “Storm Water Pollution Prevention”.

2. Stockpiling: Temporary stockpiling of approved excavated materials within the construction

staging area for later use will be permitted only in location and manner accepted by the College’s Representative.

3. Adverse Weather Conditions:

a. Do not perform fill compaction during periods when site soil moisture content is

substantially in excess of moisture content required for optimum compaction. b. Prevent erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time

structures are completed and backfilled. Keep sediments from entering drain inlets at all times during construction.

c. After interruption by adverse weather conditions, re-establish compaction specified in

last layer before resuming work.

C. Sequencing:

1. Provide schedule of the work before commencing and otherwise notify the College’s

Geotechnical Engineer and the College’s Representative before beginning any earthwork operation.

2. Sequence earthwork operations and related work including, but not necessarily limited to,

demolition, shoring, etc. so as to maintain safe working conditions and preserve existing work which is to remain.

3. Do not place fill or backfill until forms, rubbish and deleterious materials have been removed,

waterproofing measures have been installed, and areas have been accepted by the College’s Representative.

4. After grading is completed and the College’s Geotechnical Engineer has finished observation

of the work, conduct no further excavation or filling except with the College’s Representative's acceptance and observation.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: State and local code requirements shall apply to all work in

this section and to disposal of debris.

B. Earthwork, including trenching as specified in Section 02324, shall be performed with no less than

48 hours notification and only in presence of, or with acceptance by, the College’s Geotechnical

Engineer. Any materials placed or improvements constructed in absence of the College’s

Geotechnical Engineer's or the College’s Representative's acceptance to proceed shall be

presumed to be defective and, at discretion of the College’s Representative, shall be removed and

replaced at no additional cost to the College.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Native Fill Material: Soil or soil-rock mixture selectively obtained from site excavation, subject

to acceptance by the College’s Representative, to be used only for grade adjustments as approved

by the College’s Representative and conforming to the following:

1. Predominantly granular, well graded, not showing excessive shrinkage or swelling when

subjected to changes in water content. 2. Free of organic matter, debris, or other deleterious substances. 3. Thoroughly compactable without presence of excessive voids. 4. Free of rocks in excess of 2 inches in size.

B. Imported Fill Material: Soil or soil-rock mixture hauled in from off-site sources, subject to

acceptance by the College’s Representative, and conforming to the following:

1. Predominantly granular, well graded, not showing excessive shrinkage or swelling when

subjected to changes in water content (ASTM D2487-11). 2. Free of organic matter, debris, or other deleterious substances. 3. Thoroughly compatible without presence of excess voids. 4. Plasticity Index between 4 and 15 (ASTM D4318-10). 5. Have a minimum sand equivalent of 20. 6. Have a minimum Resistance ("R") Value of 30. 7. Be free of rocks in excess of 2 inches in size.

C. Aggregate Subbase: Aggregate mix hauled in from off-site sources, subject to acceptance by the College’s Representative, and conforming to the following:

1. Class 1 Aggregate Subbase conforming to Caltrans Standard Specification Section 25. 2. Have a minimum Resistance (“R”) Value of 55.

D. Aggregate Base: Aggregate mix hauled in from off-site sources, subject to acceptance by the

College’s Representative, and conforming to the following:

1. Class 2 Aggregate Base conforming to Caltrans Standard Specification Section 26. 2. Have a minimum Resistance (“R”) Value of 78.

E. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): A fluid, workable mixture of aggregate, cement and water, subject

to acceptance by the College’s Representative, and conforming to the following:

1. Slurry Cement Backfill conforming to Caltrans Standard Specification Section 19-3.062.




2. Portland Cement shall conform to Caltrans Standard Specification Section 90-2.01.

3. Aggregate shall be commercial quality concrete sand.

4. Minimum of 1 to 1.25 sacks of cement per cubic yard of material produced (see UCSC Standard Utility Trench Detail 02.2-00)

F. Pipe Bedding: Pipe bedding shall consist of clean imported sand, free from clay or organic material with 90 to 100% passing the No. 4 sieve and not more than 5% passing the No. 200 sieve

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

B. Contractor shall deliver samples to the College’s Geotechnical Engineer of all proposed earthwork

materials in sufficient quantities for required tests. Samples shall be tagged with source location

and shall be delivered at least 15 days in advance of import.

C. The College’s Geotechnical Engineer will test materials for conformance with requirements

specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.

B. Identify and flag locations of known above and below grade utilities.

C. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work.

D. Maintain and protect existing improvements intended to remain.

E. Notify the College’s Representative and College’s Geotechnical Engineer prior to commencing

operations requiring inspection or testing in accordance with articles of this Section.

F. Strip off topsoil for disposal as directed by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.


A. Conduct earthwork operations so as to prevent windblown or vehicle tracked dust and dirt from

interfering with the College’s normal operations. Assume liability for all claims related to dust

and dirt.

B. Perform Work with equipment, methods and schedule which do not interfere with the College’s

adjacent operations.

C. Modify earthwork equipment, methods, and/or schedule at no additional cost to the College as

required to reduce noise and vibration to a level acceptable to the College’s Representative.




D. Control drainage during progress of work and after completion of project in accordance with

UCSC Standards and Specifications.

E. Discontinue affected work and notify the College’s Representative upon discovery of any

unknown utility.

F. Notify the College’s Representative upon discovery of unknown wells, vaults or otherwise

enclosed spaces wherever they occur below new grade within area of new structures, paved areas,

or landscaping.

3.3 CLEARING

A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work.

B. Remove portions of existing on or below grade construction including, but not limited to curbs

and gutter, pipes, and pads. Remove base rock underneath paved areas. Sawcut construction

where adjacent portions are to remain.

3.4 STRIPPING

A. Strip areas to be further excavated or to receive fill, paving, or other improvements. Strip down to

clean mineral materials as determined by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Stockpile all strippings in a stockpile area located within the contractor staging area as directed

and approved by the College’s Representative. Stockpiled material shall have heavy tarp/fabric

between stockpile and soil below to allow for complete removal of stockpiled material without

disturbing or mixing material below.

3.5 EXCAVATION

A. After stripping, excavate areas to required elevations.

B. Excavate all soft or weak zones exposed in the excavated surface not readily capable of

compaction in place.

C. Obtain approval from the College’s Representative based on recommendations from the College’s

Geotechnical Engineer that all unsuitable materials have been removed prior to terminating

excavation.

D. Perform stockpiling as follows:

1. Stockpile excavated materials accepted for later use as fill in the contractor staging area as

directed by the College’s Representative. Stockpiles on soil will require heavy fabric underneath to assure full removal of stockpiled material.

2. Excavate, handle and remove stockpiled material for use in a manner such that loss of material

and contamination with other soils are minimized.

3. Place material in stockpile in a neat embankment without compaction.




E. Where excavation is carried below specified depth, backfill with structural concrete or engineered

fill as directed by the College’s Representative.

3.6 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. Preparation for filling:

1. Remove forms, rubbish, and deleterious materials in areas to be backfilled and obtain

acceptance from the College’s Representative based on recommendations from the College’s Geotechnical Engineer that unsuitable materials have been removed.

2. Scarify and recompact surface of areas to receive fill to eight inch depth minimum and until

surface is free of ruts or other uneven surface features.

3. Cut out soft areas not readily capable of compaction in place.

4. Bring scarified material to proper moisture content as specified in the Geotechnical Investigation. Thoroughly mix soil and water to achieve uniform moisture content.

5. Compact scarified materials to minimum compaction requirements specified for fill.

6. Stabilize surface that is unstable or "pumping", by additional excavation and placement of

engineered backfill as directed by the College’s Representative.

B. Placing and Compacting Fill:

1. Place fill materials as required to establish elevations and grades shown. 2. Spread fill material in uniform lifts not exceeding eight inches in uncompacted thickness.

3. Before compaction begins, bring fill to moisture content as specified by the College’s

Geotechnical Engineer, which will permit proper compaction by either aerating material if it is too far above optimum moisture content, or by spraying material with water if it is too far below optimum moisture content.

4. In new asphalt concrete pavement areas, the 8 inches of subgrade, and nine inches of

aggregate base, should be compacted to a minimum of 95% of its maximum dry density.

5. Mix each lift thoroughly before compaction to provide uniform distribution of moisture content.

6. Compact each layer uniformly to specified relative compaction. Compaction by flooding,

ponding or jetting will not be permitted.

7. Scarify and recompact any layer not attaining compaction until specified minimum compaction is obtained.

8. Stabilize any layer not attaining compaction before placing the next lift.

9. Remove all intrusive water and dry subgrade and fill to proper moisture content where water

enters areas to be filled. Re-establish compaction specified in last layer before proceeding with operations.




C. Preparation for Backfilling:

1. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, formwork, and water.

D. Placing and Compacting Backfill:

1. Place and compact backfill in accordance with requirements for placing and compacting fill.

E. Schedule of Locations:

1. The paragraphs below identify location, fill material to be used (identified from upper to

lower fill type), compacted thickness of each fill, and minimum relative compaction.

a. Fill for under new pavement areas as shown on the plans, shall be a minimum of eight inches native fill scarified and recompacted to 92% relative compaction, over aggregate base compacted to 95%.

b. Note that the upper foot of backfill in landscaped and unimproved areas should consist

of Native Material based on information provided by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.

3.7 GRADING

A. Bring all areas to proper grade, with allowance for finish materials, to the following tolerances:

1. Paved areas: Plus 0 or minus 0.10 feet.

2. Other areas: Plus or minus 0.20 feet.

B. Grade areas to smooth uniform surface in conformity to contour lines and spot elevations noted.

Grade to a plane where not otherwise indicated. Round or smooth abrupt changes in slopes

including the intersection of cut or fill slopes with existing natural grade. Refill any settled grades

to required levels.

C. Scarify native subgrade at paved areas to a depth of eight inches, moisture condition, and compact

to 95 percent relative compaction in accordance with requirements for placing and compacting fill.

D. Perform no further excavation or filling operations after grading is completed except by the

College’s Representative's approval and under observation of the College’s Geotechnical

Engineer.

3.8 DISPOSAL

A. Surplus material and debris becomes property of the Contractor for off-site disposal in accordance

with applicable state and local codes, ordinances, and regulations.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Prevent erosion of graded areas during construction and until permanent drainage and erosion

control measures are installed.





A. Inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

B. The College’s Geotechnical Engineer will:

1. Test any fill material from source designated by the Contractor and any site materials stockpiled for use as fill; observe excavation and check stability of subgrade, compacted fill, and backfill.

2. Be present at the site intermittently during conduct of work to observe performance of work and soil conditions encountered.

3. Perform laboratory and field density tests to evaluate compaction achieved.

4. Observe and provide engineering opinions as to adequacy of excavation, compaction of

subgrade, and placement and compaction of fill and backfill. Engineering opinions will be based on observations of work performed as well as tests and inspections deemed necessary by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

5. Observe methods of compaction and report findings to the College’s Representative.

6. Issue final report to the College’s Representative on grading; include opinion regarding degree

of compliance with specifications.

C. The Contractor will:

1. Cooperate with the College’s Geotechnical Engineer in all aspects of the work. 2. Notify the College’s Representative and the College’s Geotechnical Engineer at least 48 hours

prior to required observation or testing.

3. Be responsible for expense of all retesting of subgrade, fill, aggregate base, backfill, or other controlled material found to be inadequate at first testing, including fees for travel, personnel time, laboratory expenses, office work, supervision, and testing which may be incurred by reason of such retesting. The College’s Representative will deduct such expenses from monies due the Contractor under the Contract.

D. No earthwork shall be performed without direct knowledge of the College’s Geotechnical

Engineer unless otherwise directed by the College’s Representative.




SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide all material, labor, equipment and services necessary to do all the clearing at work site for site improvements and other related items necessary to complete the Project as indicated by the Contract Documents unless specifically excluded. Confine cleared areas to minimum area required to accomplish proposed work

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES DEMOLITION WORK

A. Locate existing utilities and protect or temporarily relocate as needed to maintain operation as needed.

C. Remove trees and root system of trees and shrubs where authorized. D. Remove existing utilities where said utilities are indicated to be removed on the construction plans. E. Remove all buried objects encountered. F. Coordinate clearing work with the College. H. Remove existing manhole lids, collars and cone sections where shown on the plans.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 31 05 13 – Earthwork

2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that existing plant life to be removed has been authorized for removal.

B. Examine site and compare individual work sites with Drawings and Specifications C. Thoroughly investigate and verify conditions under which the work is to be performed. D. No allowance will be made for extra work resulting from negligence or failure to meet requirements of

Paragraphs 31 10 00/3.01 A, B, and C. 3.2 PROTECTION

A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain from damage.



SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2

B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features not specifically designed for removal per according to the tree

protection plan and Section 31 12 00 – existing plants are to remain.

C. Protect existing structures and other existing improvements from damage or displacement.

D. Protect salvageable signs, fences, fence posts and other improvements for reinstallation. Store in secured

location approved by the College.

3.3 CLEARING

A. Clear only limited areas required for execution of work at proposed improvement location.

B. Remove paving where only authorized and necessary to execute the work.

C. Remove only trees and shrubs authorized for removal.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, organic matter, vegetation, trees and shrubs from the site and lawfully dispose of offsite

at the County landfill or other approved site off Campus.

B. Asphalt paving where designated on the plans shall be cold milled to the satisfaction of the College’s

Geotechnical Engineer.

3.5 BURIED OBJECTS ENCOUNTERED

A. Remove and dispose of all undesirable buried objects not to remain (including rock, debris, footings, and

foundations, abandoned utilities, etc.) which are encountered in the grading, trenching or subgrade

preparation.

B. Where excavating through tree roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with a saw. Roots larger than 2

inches in diameter shall remain unless authorized for removal by College’s Arborist.

3.6 SECTION INCLUDES DEMOLITION WORK

A. Establish new conduit locations with appropriate offsets to allow for trenching work.

B. Retain the services of a civil engineer or land surveyor, licensed in the State of California, for layout and

as-built surveys. C. Reset stakes, if required or disturbed during construction D. Reset benchmark if required. E. Define locations of paving walks and other site features including underground utility locations. F. Verify inverts or flowlines of existing utility structures adjacent to site or to be connected to, including

but not limited to stubs, laterals, catch basins, junction boxes and manholes.




TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 1

SECTION 312317 - TRENCHING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Excavating trenches for water service lines and for storm drainage improvements as

shown on the construction plans.

2. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations.

3. Backfilling and compaction.


1. Section 31 05 13 - Earthwork.

2. Section 33 12 16 - Flexible Pavement

3. Section 03 30 00 - Concrete Site Work

4. Section 33 05 00 - Common Work Results for Utilities

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

2. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

3. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by




1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Requirements for submittals.

B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation

required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural

calculations to support plan.

C. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.

D. Samples: Submit samples as requested by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the College’s Standards.




B. Work shall be performed under the observation of the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.

1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination.

B. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation

utilities.

C. Verify Work associated with non gravity dependent utilities does not interfere with the

installation of gravity dependent (sanitary sewer, storm sewer) utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Granular Fill: Native fill material, or imported fill material as specified in Section 31 05 13.

B. Controlled Density Fill: 1 to 1.25 sacks of cement per yard of concrete as specified in Section 31

05 13.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Geotextile Fabric: TC Mirafi 140 N woven, non-biodegradable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LINES AND GRADES

A. The contractor shall lay pipes to lines and grades indicated on Drawings and shall secure the

services of a licensed land surveyor or registered civil engineer to provide stakes for line and

grade as specified in Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering.

1. College’s Representative reserves the right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths

of utilities when changes are required for Project conditions.

B. Use laser-beam instrument with qualified operator to establish lines and grades.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Contractor shall secure a Utility Line Locator service not less than three working days before

performing Work. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within, and

surrounding, construction areas.

B. Contractor shall secure the services of a licensed land surveyor or registered civil engineer to

identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

C. Protect plant life, trees, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as portion of final

landscaping.

D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating

equipment and vehicular traffic.

E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.




F. Establish temporary traffic control and detours when trenching is performed in established

roadways and access routes. Relocate controls and reroute traffic as required during progress of

Work.

3.3 TRENCHING

A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities from utility service to point of termination.

B. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock larger than 2 inches in diameter. Remove larger

material as specified in Section 31 05 13.

C. Perform excavation within 12 inches of existing utility service by hand.

D. Do not advance open trench more than 200 feet ahead of installed pipe.

E. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation per manufacturer’s recommendations and

allow inspection. Remove water or materials that interfere with Work.

F. Excavate bottom of trenches maximum 2 feet wider than outside diameter of pipe.

G. Excavate trenches to depth indicated on Drawings. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and

support for bedding material and utilities.

H. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

I. When subsurface materials at bottom of trench are loose or soft, excavate to greater depth as

directed by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer until suitable material is encountered.

J. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with granular fill or

controlled density fill, and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for

subsequent backfill material.

K. Trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

L. Correct over excavated areas with compacted backfill as specified for authorized excavation or

replace with controlled density fill as directed by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer.

M. Remove excess subsoil not intended for reuse, from site.

3.4 SHEETING AND SHORING

A. Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures and adjacent

properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of surrounding subsoil.

B. Support trenches more than 4 feet deep excavated through unstable, loose, or soft material.

Provide sheeting, shoring, bracing, or other protection to maintain stability of excavation.

C. Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation work.

D. Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement of filled

excavations or adjacent soil.

E. Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or other causes

resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing.

3.5 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with approved fill materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over

porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces.




C. Place fill material in continuous layers and compact in accordance with schedule at end of this

Section.

D. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation or retaining wall perimeter

drainage, utilities in trench, and existing utilities to remain.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

F. Do not leave more than 50 feet of trench open at end of working day.

G. Protect open trench to prevent danger to the public.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control: Tolerances.

B. Top Surface of Backfilling to Subgrade Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.08 feet from

required elevations.

C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 0.08 feet from required elevations.


A. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Testing and inspection services.

B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following:

1. Density Tests: ASTM D2922 (Relative Compaction by Nuclear Gage).

2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017 (Moisture of Soils and Aggregate by Nuclear Gage).

D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact,

and retest.

E. Frequency of Tests: As specified by the College’s Geotechnical Engineer or College

Representative.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 77 00 – Contract Closeout: Protecting finished work.

B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

3.9 SCHEDULE

A. Electrical Conduit:

1. Cover conduit and bedding with Granular Fill to subgrade elevation.

2. Each lift not to exceed 8 inches of non compacted depth.

3. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.




AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 32 11 23 - 1

SECTION 321123 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. New Class 2 Aggregate Base Course for new asphalt concrete pavement areas and trenching areas

as shown on the plans.

B. Related Sections 1. Section 31 05 13 – Earthwork 2. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching 3. Section 32 12 16 – Flexible Pavement 4. Section 03 30 00 – Concrete Site Work

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Standards listed below, with their designation in parenthesis, apply where designation is cited in this

Section. Where the applicable year of adoption or revision is not listed below, the latest edition applies.

B. State of California, Department of Transportation's "Standard Specification's" (CSS). 1. Interpretation of Standard Specifications:

a. Wherever the term Commission of Department occurs, it shall mean the College. Whenever the term Director or Executive Officer occurs, it shall mean the College's Representative.

b. All references to statistical testing are deleted. c. Whenever a discrepancy occurs between the Standard Specifications and this specification,

this specification governs.

C. State of California, Department of Transportation's "Testing Manual", "Method of Preparation of

Bituminous Mixtures for Testing" (California Test 304).

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following: 1. Certificates of compliance with specified standards for natural materials and manufactured items. 3. For manufactured items, the manufacturer's technical data of physical properties. 3. Samples as requested by the College's Testing Laboratory.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. (Pavement) Subgrade: The material in excavation or embankments underlying the lowest layer of

subbase, base, pavement surfacing or other specified layer which is to be placed. (The surface upon

which embankment is to be placed is sometimes called "subgrade" in other sections, not to be confused

with pavement subgrade).




B. Structural Section: The planned traffic support layers of specified materials, normally consisting of

subbase, base, and pavement placed over the pavement subgrade. The structural section is also

commonly called the pavement structural section.

C. Subbase: A layer of aggregate of designed thickness and specified quality placed on the pavement

subgrade as the foundation for a base.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Comply with all requirements of the Monterey Bay Unified Air Pollution Control District.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregate Base (AB): Class 2, R-value 78 minimum, 3/4 inch maximum size, meeting the requirements

of CSS Section 26.

B. Aggregate Subbase: Class 2, R-value 50 minimum, CSS Section 25.


A. Examine areas to receive aggregate base and verify the following:

1. That abutting improvements have been set at proper elevations. 2. That gradients and elevations of pavement subgrade are correct. 3. That wet receiving surfaces or other conditions that adversely affect execution of this Work are

absent.

B. Do not start Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. If after initial preparation, the pavement subgrade is allowed to stand or is used by construction

equipment, or is otherwise damaged, repair in accordance with CSS 26-1.03 at no additional cost to the

College.

B. Proof-roll the pavement subgrade for pumping as defined in Section 31 05 13. Where moisture appears

on the pavement subgrade surface after rolling, repair as directed by Strategic Construction

Management, at no additional cost to the College.

C. Protect existing Work from damage. Protect concrete Work from staining with asphalt materials.

Shield from overspray.

D. Damaged asphalt and areas completely saturated by oil and grease should be removed and replaced as

required.

3.3 AGGREGATE BASE




A. Spread and compact in accordance with CSS Section 26, to thickness, lines and grades noted, with a

maximum deviation of plus 0.0 and minus 0.05 feet from plan grade.

B. Do not incorporate into the completed section any base material used for construction traffic.

C. Moisture Treat the compacted base in accordance with CSS Section 17.


A. Inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00.

B. The District's Testing Laboratory will: 1. Inspect and test base and paving in accordance with CSS, including but not limited to

a. Compaction and thickness of base. b. Compaction and thickness of asphaltic concrete. c. Temperature of asphalt concrete just prior to paving.

2. Check thickness of surfacing by coring when directed by the College’s Representative.

C. Contractor will: 1. Repair areas cored for testing. 2. As directed by Strategic Construction Management, remove and replace or repair all paving not

meeting Contract Document requirements.




ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1

SECTION 32 12 16 – ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Sawcut and remove existing asphalt concrete pavement. 2. Construct new asphalt concrete pavement section where shown on plan.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Course 2. Section 31 23 13 – Subgrade Preparation 3. Section 31 23 17 – Trenching 4. Section 31 23 24 – Flowable Fill

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Standards listed below, with their designation in parenthesis, apply where designation is cited in this

Section. Where the applicable year of adoption or revision is not listed below, the latest edition

applies.

B. State of California, Department of Transportation's "Standard Specification's" Latest Edition (CSS). 1. Interpretation of Standard Specifications:

a. Wherever the term Commission of Department occurs, it shall mean the College. Whenever the term Director or Executive Officer occurs, it shall mean the College's Representative.

b. Whenever a discrepancy occurs between the Standard Specifications and this specification, this specification governs.

C. State of California, Department of Transportation's "Testing Manual", "Method of Preparation of

Bituminous Mixtures for Testing" (California Test 304).

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following: 1. Certificates of compliance with specified standards for natural materials and manufactured

items. 2. For manufactured items, the manufacturer's technical data of physical properties. 3. Slurry mix design. Include recommended aggregate grading, asphalt content, and supporting

stabilimeter test results conforming to California Test 304. Do not schedule seal coat work until submittal has been reviewed.

4. Samples as requested by the College's Testing Laboratory. 1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. (Pavement) Subgrade: The material in excavation or embankments underlying the lowest layer of

subbase, base, pavement surfacing or other specified layer which is to be placed. (The surface upon

which embankment is to be placed is sometimes called "subgrade" in other sections, not to be

confused with pavement subgrade).




B. Structural Section: The planned traffic support layers of specified materials, normally consisting of

subbase, base, and pavement placed over the pavement subgrade. The structural section is also

commonly called the pavement structural section.

C. Subbase: A layer of aggregate of designed thickness and specified quality placed on the pavement

subgrade as the foundation for a base.

D. Surface Course: The top layer of AC pavement. The top layer of AC pavement is sometimes called

the "wearing course".

E. Pavement Reinforcing Fabric: Pavement reinforcing fabric as part of the AC overlay.

F. Leveling Course: A layer of A.C. pavement placed over uneven surfaces and extensive cracking

prior to placing pavement fabric or reinforcing mesh.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Comply with all requirements of Cabrillo Community College District.

B. Do not place Slurry Seal or Asphalt Concrete unless atmospheric temperature is at least 50 degrees

Fahrenheit and rising.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregates: Asphalt Concrete (AC): Type B, 1/2 inch maximum size, medium grading, CSS

Section 39.

B. Asphalt Binder: Steam-refined paving asphalt, grade AR-8000, CSS Section 92.

C. Prime Coat: Liquid asphalt, Grade MC-70, CSS Section 93.

D. Paint Binder or Tack Coat: Type SS1h of SS1 asphaltic emulsion, CSS Section 94.

E. Sand: The sand shall be 30 mesh sand blast sand composed of clean hard durable particles, free

from lumps of clay or organic material.

I. Water: The water used in all mixtures shall be fresh and potable.

F. Pavement Reinforcing Fabric: Reinforcing fabric shall conform to requirements of “TruPave” by

Owens Corning or approved Equal.

2.2 MIXES

A. Asphalt Concrete (AC): 1. CSS Section 39, Type B asphalt concrete, 1/2”maximum gradation. 2. Determine the amount of asphalt binder in accordance with the mix design.

B. Bituminous Seals: CSS Slurry Seal or OverKote Asphalt Paving Coating or its Equivalent.




D. Do not change sources from those used in mix designs without prior written approval by the

College's Representative.


A. Examine areas to receive asphalt concrete paving or slurry seal and verify the following: 1. That abutting improvements have been set at proper elevations. 2. That gradients and elevations of pavement subgrade are correct. 3. That wet receiving surfaces or other conditions that adversely affect execution of this Work

are absent.

B. Do not start Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Damaged asphalt and areas completely saturated by oil and grease should be removed and replaced

as required.

B. All weeds or other vegetation growing through the asphaltic concrete shall be removed and sprayed

with a suitable sterilant.

C. All areas to receive slurry shall be power bromides to remove dirt debris and other materials prior to

placing the seal coat.

3.3 BASE PRIME COAT

A. After Base has been accepted by the College's Representative, place asphalt concrete paving on new

aggregate base while base is still tight and damp.

B. If base has been allowed to dry before placing asphalt concrete, apply prime coat in amount of 0.25

gallons per square yard of surface area to base in accordance with CSS Section 39, at no additional

cost to College. Allow at least 24 hours for prime coat to set; remove any puddles; and spread sand

over damp spots before placing asphalt concrete.

3.4 PAINT BINDER

A. Prior to placing asphalt concrete surfacing, apply a coat of asphaltic emulsion paint binder to all

vertical contact surfaces in accordance with CSS Section 39 at an approximate rate of 0.10 gallons

per square yard of surface covered.

3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE

A. After prime coats have been approved by the Colleges Representative, spread and compact asphalt

concrete paving to compacted thickness shown on Drawings in accordance with CSS Section 39,

including all requirements for mix temperatures, and thickness of layers.

B. Provide surface which is dense, smooth, tight, free from pores, loose material of segregation, within

tolerances specified, and free of bird baths.




C. Finished surface shall be no more than 0.01 feet below the bottom of a 12-foot straightedge laid on

the surface in any direction.

D. Place asphalt concrete so that finished surface will be 0" to 1/8" above edge of adjacent concrete

gutters designed to collect water runoff, or 0" to 1/8" below edge of adjacent concrete designed to

deposit runoff onto paved surface.

E. Carefully roll with proper heat at edges alongside curbs, walks and driveways to match balance of

rolled work. Hand tamping will be permitted only where inaccessible to heavy equipment.


A. The College's Testing Laboratory will:

1. Inspect and test base and paving in accordance with CSS, including but not limited to:

a. Compaction and thickness of base. b. Compaction and thickness of asphaltic concrete. c. Temperature of asphalt concrete just prior to paving.

2. Check thickness of surfacing by coring when directed by the College's Representative.

B. Contractor will:

1. Repair areas cored for testing.

2. As directed by the College's Representative, remove and replace or repair all paving not

meeting Contract Document requirements. 3.7 PROTECTION

A. Permit no surface traffic until surface has cooled sufficiently to resist damage.




PRECAST CONCRETE UTILITY STRUCTURES 33 05 16 - 1

SECTION 330516 - PRECAST UTILITY STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes precast concrete utility structures:

1. Utility boxes.

2. Frames and covers.


1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

2. Section 03 30 00 – Concrete Site Work.

3. Section 31 05 13 - Earthwork.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M306 - Drainage Structure Castings.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

2. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and

Mass Concrete.

3. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight

Concrete.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

2. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

3. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

4. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.

5. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content of

Concrete.

6. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.




7. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

8. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

9. ASTM C857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for

Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

10. ASTM C891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility

Structures.

11. ASTM C913 - Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater

Structures.

12. ASTM C1244 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air

Pressure (Vacuum) Test.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit data for structures, frames and covers, steps, component construction, features,

configuration, and dimensions.


A. Obtain precast concrete utility structures from single source.

B. Perform structural design in accordance with ACI 318.

C. Preform Work in accordance with NPCA Quality Control Manual for Precast Plants.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Certified by NPCA Plant Certification Program prior to and during Work of this

section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and

protecting products.

B. Comply with precast concrete manufacturer’s instructions for unloading, storing and moving

precast structures. Lift structures from designated lifting points.

C. Do not deliver products until concrete has cured 5 days or attained minimum 75 percent of

specified 28 day compressive strength.

D. Store precast concrete structures to prevent damage to College’s property or other public or

private property. Repair property damaged from materials storage.




E. Mark each precast structure by indentation or waterproof paint showing date of manufacture,

manufacturer, and identifying symbols and numbers shown on Drawings to indicate its intended

use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE UTILITY STRUCTURES

A. Fabricators:

1. Santa Rosa Cast Products Company.

2. Christy Concrete.

3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements regarding Product

Options and Substitutions.

B. Precast Concrete Utility Structures: Reinforced precast concrete.

C. Foundation Slab: Cast-in-place or Precast concrete, leveled top surface.

2.2 FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Santa Rosa Cast Products.

2. Christy Concrete.

3. Neenah Foundry Co.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements regarding Product

Options and Substitutions.

5. Furnish materials in accordance with College Standards.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Steps: Formed galvanized steel rungs.

1. Diameter: 3/4 inch minimum

2. Width: 12 inches.

3. Spacing: 16 on center vertically.

B. Inserted and Embedded Items:

1. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; with galvanized coating.




C. Joint Sealants and Joint Gaskets:

1. Gasket Joints for Circular Concrete Pipe: ASTM C443; oil-resistant rubber gaskets.

2. External Sealing Bands: ASTM C877 (ASTM C877M); Type I rubber and mastic bands.

3. Preformed Joint Sealants for Concrete Pipe and Box Sections: ASTM C990.

4. Elastomeric Joint Sealants: ASTM C920; polyurethane.

D. Pipe Entry Connectors: ASTM C923.

E. Grout:

1. Cement Grout: Portland cement, sand and water mixture with stiff consistency to suit

intended purpose.

F. Bituminous Coating:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Bitumastic Model.

b. Beazer East, Inc.

c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements regarding

Product Options and Substitutions.

G. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 211.1.

H. Provide concrete to the following criteria:

1. Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days.

2.4 SUMP BELOW GRADE SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. ADS Nyoplast drain basins, suitable for exposure to corrosive soils.

2. Polylok 20” HD cover

3. Carlson, or approved equal

B. College to size and install sump pump and force main piping.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate precast concrete utility structures in accordance with ACI 318. and NPCA Quality

Control Manual for Precast Plants.

B. Fabricate precast concrete utility structures to size, configuration, knock out panels, and openings

as indicated on Drawings.




2.6 CONCRETE FINISHES

A. Formed Surfaces Not Exposed to View: As formed.

B. Exposed to View Finishes: light broom.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify correct size and elevation of excavation.

D. Verify subgrade and bedding is properly prepared, compacted and ready to receive Work of this

section.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections.

B. Do not install structures where site conditions induce loads exceeding structural capacity of

structures.

C. Inspect precast concrete structures immediately prior to placement in excavation to verify are

internally clean and free from damage. Remove and replace damaged units.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install underground precast utility structures in accordance with ASTM C891.

B. Lift precast concrete structures at lifting points designated by manufacturer.

C. When lowering structures into excavations and joining pipe to units, take precautions to ensure

interior of pipeline and structure remains clean.

D. Install precast concrete base to elevation and alignment indicated on Drawings.

E. Remove knockouts or cut structure to receive piping without creating openings larger than

required to receive pipe. Fill annular space with grout.

F. Connect pipe to structure and seal watertight. Cut pipe flush with interior of structure.

G. Grout base to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth.

H. Set frame and cover level without tipping, to elevations indicated on Drawings.




I. Backfill excavations for structures in accordance with Section 31 05 13.




STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 41 00 - 1

SECTION 33 41 00 - UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Storm drainage piping.

2. Accessories.

3. Underground pipe markers.

4. Catch basins and plant area drains.

5. Cleanouts.

6. Bedding and cover materials.


1. Section 02055 - Soils for Earthwork: Soils for backfill in trenches.

2. Section 02060 - Aggregates for Earthwork: Aggregate for backfill in trenches.

3. Section 02315 - Excavation and Fill: Product and execution requirements for excavation and

backfill required by this section.

4. Section 02320 - Backfill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section.

5. Section 02324 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this section.

6. Section 02081 - Manholes and Structures.

7. Section 15160 - Storm Drainage Piping: Product and execution requirements for storm

drainage piping within 5 feet (1500 mm) of building.

C. References from ASTM International:

1. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-

Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

2. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for

Gravity-Flow Applications.

3. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.



5. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic

Pipe.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe, pipe accessories, and fittings.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures required to install Products

specified.


A. Project Record Documents:

1. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert

elevations.




2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted

utilities.


A. Perform Work in accordance with Caltrans Standards.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

A. Where full sections of pipe have to be replaced, provide plastic pipe per ASTM D3034, SDR 26,

Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) material, schedule 80, size to match existing unless otherwise noted,

with bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed gasket joint.

1. Fittings: PVC.

2. Joints: ASTM F477, elastomeric gaskets.

2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Bright colored, continuously printed, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil

thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

B. Tracer Wire: #10 AWG shielded copper wire taped to top of pipe at 3’ intervals, terminate at

locations designated by the University’s Representative.

2.3 CATCH BASINS AND AREA DRAINS

A. Catch Basin Lid and Frame:

1. Construction: Cast iron construction, hinged lid, or concrete lid.

2. Nominal Lid and Frame Size to match existing being replaced.

B. Shaft Construction and Cone Top Section: Reinforced Precast Concrete pipe sections, lipped

male/female joints, nominal shaft diameter to match existing being replace. Manufactured by

Christy or approved equal.

C. Area Drains at Slab-on-grade:

1. Construction: Cast iron construction, with 9” diameter opening and a 4” pipe connection.

Provide medium-duty

2. Manufacturer: Zurn or approved equal. Must be compatible with slab on grade construction.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Refer to section 33 05 16 for Precast Concrete Utility Structures where utility structures are

removed or damaged during the course of construction.




2.5 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

A. Bedding and Cover:

1. Bedding: Select Sand as specified in Section 31 05 13 - Earthwork.

2. Cover: Flowable Fill as specified in Section 31 05 13 – Earthwork and Section 31 23 24

Fowable Fill.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify subgrade is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as

indicated on construction drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent

backfilling or compaction.

3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 17 – Earthwork for work of this Section.

Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 8

compacted depth.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

B. Form and place Cast-In-Place Concrete base pad, with provision for storm drain pipe end

sections.

C. Level top surface of base pad; sleeve concrete shaft sections to receive storm drain pipe sections.

D. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated on Drawings.

E. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.


A. Request inspection prior to placing aggregate cover over pipe.

B. When tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.




3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in

progress.

1. Take care not to damage or displace installed pipe and joints during construction of pipe

supports, backfilling, testing, and other operations.

2. Repair or replace pipe that is damaged or displaced from construction operations.
